JP6847083B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine and a rotating body game machine, and in particular, a set value indicating a stage regarding a probability of winning a game state advantageous to the player is used as an operation. Regarding the technical field related to the game machine that can be set based on the above.

For example, various types of gaming machines are widely known, such as ball-ball gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines.
As a gaming machine, for example, there is a slot machine in which a setting value indicating a stage regarding a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to a player can be set based on an operation.

The following Patent Document 1 can be mentioned as a related prior art.

Japanese Patent No. 5956529

An object of the present invention is to reduce the storage capacity of a storage means for storing various control information related to a set value in a gaming machine in which a set value can be set.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a setting means capable of setting a setting value related to a winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state advantageous to the player, and a display means capable of displaying setting information which is information related to the set value. And, based on the establishment of the first condition, the settable means for starting the settable period, which is the period in which the set value can be set, and the period during which the set value can be confirmed based on the establishment of the second condition. It is provided with a confirmation enabling means for starting a setting confirmation period, and the setting information is intermittently transmitted to the display means at a predetermined cycle by using a common display control process in the settable period and the setting confirmation period. It is configured to display and execute the determination of the establishment of the first condition with priority over the determination of the establishment of the second condition, and after the configurable period or the setting confirmation period ends, the operation confirmation of the display means is performed. It executes the setting process for displaying .

By using the common display control process when displaying the setting information in the settable period and the setting confirmation period as described above, it is possible to standardize the program used for the display control of the setting information in each period. ..

According to the present invention, the storage capacity of the storage means can be reduced.

It is a front side perspective view which shows the appearance of the game machine as the embodiment which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine as an embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of the game machine as an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing about the example of the look-ahead notice production in an embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process of the main control side of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the initial setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the power supply abnormality check process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between each judgment condition in operation side at the time of transition to a setting change processing, a RAM clear processing, a setting confirmation processing, and a backup restoration processing, and a value of a W register. It is a flowchart which showed the main loop processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the output management process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the 7-segment decoding table. It is a figure which illustrated the relationship between the segment composition and the display pattern of a segment in the display of a set value. It is a flowchart which showed the RAM clear process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting confirmation process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the set value offset conversion table. It is a flowchart which showed the main loop preprocessing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt processing of the main control side of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the power supply check / backup process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the setting abnormality check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol management process in FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a start port check process in FIG. 21 in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit random number determination process in FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot random number determination method of embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the random number determination table for jackpot determination used for the jackpot random number determination processing. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern lottery process in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example of the deviation variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed other example of the hit variation pattern table of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error of an embodiment. It is a figure which showed other example of the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the storage example of the 1st data table and the 2nd data table in embodiment. It is a figure which showed the 1st data table and the other storage example of the 2nd data table in embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the storage area structure in ROM of a main control part. It is explanatory drawing of the scenario registration information, the lamp data registration information, and the motor data registration information of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the sound data registration information of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the main scenario table of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the sub-scenario table of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect control main process of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command analysis process in the effect control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the command correspondence processing in the production control of an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect control timer interrupt process of an embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the display control timing of embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated one display mode of the setting operation history. It is the figure which showed the example of the setting confirmation screen. It is a figure which showed the example of the history display information in an embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the backup operation example of the history display information as an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the additional processing of the individual history information in the history display information. It is a flowchart of history information initial setting processing at the time of power-on of embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process for updating the history information according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display. It is a flowchart of the history information update processing of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the history display processing of embodiment. It is a flowchart of the history information screen creation process of an embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the numerical value of the set value which can be expressed in an embodiment. It is a flowchart of the left symbol lottery process of embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the left symbol lottery table. It is the figure which showed the example of the offset table for the left symbol lottery. It is the flowchart which showed another example of the left symbol lottery process. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the left symbol lottery used in the process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart of the mini character notice lottery process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the 1st mini character notice lottery table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the first notice. It is a figure which showed the example of the 2nd mini character notice lottery table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for the second notice. It is a flowchart of the jackpot production lottery process of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. It is a figure which showed the example of the 1st offset table for reference to the table of FIG. 68. It is a figure which showed the example of the 2nd offset table for referring to the table of FIG. 68. It is a flowchart of SU notice lottery processing of embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU effect table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU stage lottery. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement table. It is a figure which showed the example of the offset table for SU3 replacement. It is a flowchart which showed another example of SU notice lottery processing. It is a figure which showed the example of the SU3 replacement first offset table and SU3 replacement second offset table used in the process of FIG. 76. It is explanatory drawing about the lottery mode example of SU notice production in embodiment. It is a flowchart of the setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a first modification. It is a flowchart of the setting-related command processing (S2130e) as a second modification. It is a figure which showed the example of the setting value conversion table used by the effect control part in the modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.

<1. Game machine structure>
<2. Game machine control configuration>
[2-1. Main control unit]
(About the operation to change the set value)
(About performance display)
(Direction control command)
[2-2. Production control unit]
<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3-1. Design fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol variation display game)
(Decorative pattern variation display game)
(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
(About hold)
[3-2. Game state]
[3-3. About hit]
[3-4. About the production]
(Direction mode)
(Notice production)
(Direction means)
<4. Main control processing>
[4-1. Main control side main processing]
(Initial setting process)
(Processing after initial setting)
(Main loop processing)
(Setting change processing)
(RAM clear processing)
(Setting confirmation process)
(Main loop pre-processing)
(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)
[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
(Power check / backup process)
(Error management and processing for game progress, etc.)
[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol management process)
(Special figure 1 Start port check process)
(Special symbol change start processing)
(Variation management process)
(Big hit random number judgment processing)
(Variable pattern lottery process)
(Advantages of data table related to set values as an embodiment)
<5. Production control unit processing>
[5-1. Outline of processing]
[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]
[5-3. About the data type of the set value in the embodiment]
[5-4. Setting suggestion production]
(Suggestion production by the design on the left)
(Suggestion production by mini character notice)
(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)
(Suggestion production by SU notice)
[5-5. About the difference in the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]
<6. Modification example>
<7. Summary of embodiments>
<8. Other variants

<1. Game machine structure>

The structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “game machine 1”) has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and is attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in the mounted game board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. Have. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and payout of the game balls to the game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card returning button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided. Further, the upper saucer unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The built-in lamp (button LED75) of the effect button 13 is lit during a predetermined input reception period to enable operation (input reception is possible), and a predetermined operation (press, repeated hit, long press, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. It is possible to bring about a change in the production by doing.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the front operation panel 7 is provided with a cross key 16 for a user such as a player or a hall staff to select various items and give direction instructions. There is.

Further, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, LEDs for light effect by full-color LED) are provided at appropriate positions of the glass door 6 to exert a light effect by decorating light. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) as the decorative lamp 45 are provided around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a. The four corners are non-gaming areas.

In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, symbols, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently used. The liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), the middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and the right symbol (corresponding to the right display area) It is provided. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images in addition to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winded manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow of the game balls depends on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables the road to be distributed to the left and right. In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths of the game balls are formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and has a left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and a right flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is started at the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and is decorated with various notice effects (effect images). The symbol variation display games are being executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. There are five types of compound called compound: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, status notification during the fluctuation time shortening function operation (during time reduction) and during high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this ordinary symbol display device 39a, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is. Further, a round number display device 39b is provided in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The round number display device 39b notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. Ordinary variable winning devices 41 are provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of them to detect the passage of a game ball. ing.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases, "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as), and is configured as a winning rate fixed winning device having no starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path 3b to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down the ball has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, as a starting port opening / closing means, a so-called "electric tulip" is provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that open or expand the lower starting port 35, which is the second special symbol starting port. It is configured as a "type" winning device.

The lower start port 35 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases, abbreviated as "special symbol 2". ) Is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an open state (operated or not activated) that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operated or non-actuated) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into a closed state (difficult to win), which makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) that makes it impossible to win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, three general winning openings 43 are arranged on the left side and one on the right side, for a total of four, and inside each of them, a general winning hole for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed. Further, in the area of the game board, a movable body accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual effect is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

Further, diagonally upward to the right of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c, a normal symbol start port 37 (third start) composed of a passage gate (specific passage area) through which the game ball can pass. Means) are provided. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in both flow paths, respectively.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the region above the upper side 55a of the bulge portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the grand prize opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is placed on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game balls roll on the large winning opening 50, and the game balls are further arranged in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win the lower starting opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 is open (the large winning opening 50 is open), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start port The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. The movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is more advantageous than the normal state when it is in a gaming state accompanied by a state with electric support, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, what kind of striking method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the game state accompanied by the "state without electric support" described later, the "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and the "electric support" described later is considered to be advantageous. In the game state accompanied by the "presence state", the "right-handed" aiming at the game ball so as to pass through the right flow path 3c is considered to be advantageous.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, if there is a prize in a prize opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, each winning opening is promised. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 50, and 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3). It is supposed to be paid out from (see). The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49.
Here, "winning" means a winning opening that does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol starting port 37). If is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" occurs in the winning opening. It is treated as if it had been done. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, whether or not the game ball is detected by the winning detection switch. Regardless of this, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where the game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game machine control configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game motion control of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The game machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") and a main control unit that collectively control control (game operation control) related to the overall game operation. An effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives an effect control command from 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means, and a prize ball. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls payouts, and a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) that generates and supplies the power supply required for the game machine 1 from an external power source (not shown). Is configured to have.
A liquid crystal control unit 40 that drives the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The liquid crystal control unit 40 is, for example, a microcomputer mounted on a substrate separate from various substrates such as the above-mentioned main control board (main control unit) 20, effect control board (effect control unit) 24, payout control board 29, and power supply board. It is configured with a computer.
In FIG. 3, the power supply route to each part is omitted.

[2-1. Main control unit]

The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microcomputer incorporating a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 201 (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure, various data necessary for game operation control are stored. It is equipped with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 202 (main control ROM) for storing and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area or buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer as a whole. ..

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 is used for a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) for a fixed period, and a time measurement function, and a CPU 201. An interrupt controller circuit that exerts an interrupt enable / interrupt prohibit function such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal, and can output a system reset signal to reset the CPU 201 by detecting power on / off or power failure. Reset circuit, watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of the control program, and out-of-area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range. , And a counter circuit for generating a certain range of random numbers in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

The main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a winning (ball winning) in the upper starting port 34, a lower starting port sensor 35a for detecting a winning in the lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43, and the out opening 49 An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) discharged from the player is connected, and the main control unit 20 is capable of receiving detection signals output from these. Based on the detection signals from each sensor, the main control unit 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball has entered.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Furthermore, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and it is possible to transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol.

Further, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 displays and controls various information displayed on the composite display device 38c, such as control signals and rounds. It is possible to transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling a specified number of rounds by a big hit displayed on the number display device 39b.

Further, the frame external centralized terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is predetermined to the hall computer HC provided outside the game machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, jackpot information, prize ball number information, symbol change execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control unit 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the pachinko hall game machine.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command) that specifies.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are receiving a payout control command from the main control unit 20, controlling the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmitting a status signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal of. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) and a full detection sensor 60 that detects the full state of the upper tray 9 with the game balls. , The front door open sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects at least the open state of the front frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This status signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that at least the front frame 2 is open, a supply shortage signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball. A counting error signal indicating that the payout is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and the like are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines the open state of the front frame 2 (door opening error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (supply shortage error), and the upper tray 9. Monitor the full state (ball jam error), etc.

Furthermore, the launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and it is possible to transmit a permission signal for permitting the launch to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the payout control board 29, and operates the launch operation handle 15. Realizes the firing operation of the game ball by. Specifically, the player touches the handle by the fact that the launch permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (launch permission signal ON state) and the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the presence is detected and the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal is not output (launch permission signal OFF state), the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, the ball jamming signal is transmitted to the main control unit 20 and the output of the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 is stopped (launch permission signal OFF), and the upper tray 9 is used. It is designed to stop the launching operation until the full state of the is cleared.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the launch permission is instructed by the main control unit 20.

Here, the main control unit 20 is connected to the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98, and is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for instructing and inputting to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to the setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting the setting key possessed by the hall staff at the time of turning on the power and performing the ON / OFF operation.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not the player is allowed to win a favorable gaming state.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON / OFF in response to the operation of the RAM clear button provided so as to be operable in the state where the front frame 2 is open. Further, the setting key switch 98 is provided with a key cylinder in which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and removed, and is turned on by rotating the setting key inserted in the key cylinder in the forward direction. It is turned off by being rotated in the opposite direction from the ON state. The key cylinder is provided so that the operation can be performed by inserting the setting key with the front frame 2 open. The key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting the setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for the operation of changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially advancing the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate positions inside the game machine 1. For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20.

A setting / performance indicator 97 is connected to the main control unit 20.
The setting / performance display 97 is configured to include, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display means capable of displaying a set value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting / performance indicator 97 is mounted at a position on the main control unit (main control board) 20 that is easy to see, for example.
The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and performance information to the setting / performance display 97.

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a big hit (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). Therefore, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the set value), which is advantageous to the player. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball output rate, PAYOUT rate)", which is advantageous for the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the jackpot winning probability, machine discount, etc., and means a value related to the susceptibility to a specific event such as a profit state acting on the player. In the present embodiment, the advantage related to the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are 6 stages (advantage stages) of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the range that can be used according to the rules of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "usable range Re") is the range of "1" to "6".
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only three values of, for example, "1", "2", and "6" among the set values Ve of "1" to "6" in the usable range Re. To do. In other words, the specification is limited to 3 stages instead of 6 stages, which is the maximum stage in the rules, regarding the winning probability.
Hereinafter, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the range of the set value Ve actually used among the set value Ve within the usable range Re (“1” in the above example. "The range of" 2 "and" 6 ") is referred to as" the range of use Ru ".

The set value Ve is set exclusively by the hall staff such as the hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (game store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is to be changed according to the set value Ve, and the target jackpot type. For example, if there are three types of jackpots 1-3, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1-3, or the jackpots 1-3. The total winning probability may be increased. In addition, the probability of winning some big hits may be increased. For example, only the winning probability of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be set to a constant winning probability with all the set values Ve.

(About the operation to change the set value)

In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (operated to the setting change mode side) while the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and the front frame 2 is released. The power to the game machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance indicator 97, and the mode shifts to the "setting change mode" in which the set value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is performed in the main control side main process described later (see step S104 in FIG. 5). When the above-mentioned operating conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the process for changing the setting is executed accordingly.

After the transition to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as the setting value Ve change operator is turned on, the current display value of the setting / performance indicator 97 changes to "1 → 2 → 6 → 1 → 1 →". It can be switched to the circulation type within the range of use Ru like "2 → 6 → ...". Then, when the desired set value Ve is reached, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the set value Ve is determined, and the information of the determined set value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting / performance indicator 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state shifts to the state where the game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information on the setting / performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm, and typical examples are information on the presence or absence of illegal prize balls such as excess prize balls for game machine 1 and information on the original ball ejection performance of game machine 1. Is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect.

Therefore, the setting / performance display 97 is inside the game machine 1, for example, the main control unit (main control board) 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, and the effect control unit (effect control board (liquid crystal)). It is provided at a position where the display information can be visually recognized when the front frame 2 is opened, such as on the (including the control board) 24) or the board case (protective cover that protects the board).

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (total number of prize balls in the specific state: α) is the total number of out balls discharged from the out port 49 in the specific state (out in the specific state). Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) divided by the number: β) can be adopted as the performance information.
The above "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when winning the winning openings (upper starting opening 34, lower starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 50). Is. In the case of the present embodiment, the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 is 3, the large winning opening 50 is 13, and the general winning opening 43 is 10.
In addition, which state is to be adopted as the specific state can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of state the performance information is to be grasped. In the case of the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probability variation state, and the jackpot game can be adopted. Further, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, it is a normal state and a probable change state, all game states except during a hit game, and the type to be measured can be appropriately determined.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is either a low probability state or a high probability state may be adopted.
Further, the total number of payouts may be one or a plurality of specific winning openings excluded from the measurement target (total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, the one excluding the large winning opening 50 from the measurement target may be used as the total number of payouts.

(2) In addition, only any one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of payouts in the normal state) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of outs in the normal state) are measured in real time, and the number of payouts in the normal state is the number of outs in the normal state. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by is multiplied by 100 (the value calculated by the number of payouts in normal time ÷ the number of outs in normal time × 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “normal time ratio information”). The displayed value at this time shall be a value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the normal time ratio information is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (specific medium total prize ball number storage area, specific medium out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area), respectively. It is designed to be stored (memorized). However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. This specified number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during the total gaming state (including during the winning game) (hereinafter referred to as "total number of out balls"). The total number of out-states is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (storage area for all-state outs) of the RAM 203. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specific medium total prize ball number storage area, the specific medium out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end time is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal time payout number, normal time out number). And all state out number), and then start the measurement again (normal time payout number, normal time out number, normal time ratio information and all state out ball number measurement are started). Then, the setting / performance display 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. In addition to the previous information, the history of the previous two times or the previous time (three times before) may be displayed so that the information up to the previous time can be appropriately determined.

Here, in the case of this example, the set value Ve and the performance information are selectively displayed on the setting / performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, setting changes and setting confirmations are performed only at startup when the power is turned on, so settings are made according to the transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after startup when the power is turned on. The set value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and the performance information is displayed after the setting change and the setting confirmation are completed.
The configuration is not limited to displaying the set value Ve and the performance information on a common display, and it is also possible to display the set value Ve and the performance information on separate displays. In that case, the set value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Direction control command)

The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting various effect control commands including information on the special symbol variation display game, information on errors, and the like to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraud such as goto acts, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the one-way communication configuration is such that the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

Here, the effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, the effect control command of MODE Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled in the active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

[2-2. Production control unit]

The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and is also equipped with an acoustic control unit (sound source IC), RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. And control the overall production operation.
The effect control unit 24 of this example has a memory 244 in addition to the above RAM 243 as a memory capable of reading and writing information. The memory 244 is composed of, for example, SRAM, and the reading speed of information by the CPU 241 is slower than that of the RAM 243. The backup power supply is not connected to the RAM 243, and it is said that the storage information cannot be retained when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. On the other hand, the memory 244 is connected to the backup power supply and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Even if it is done, the stored information can be retained.
The use of the memory 244 will be described later.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are to receive the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determine the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, and control the liquid crystal control unit 40 to cause the liquid crystal display device 36 to display an image. , Sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 75, other production LEDs (not shown)), operation control of the movable body (accessory), and the like.

The liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as a computer device including a CPU and various memory devices, and controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The liquid crystal control unit 40 stores an image that stores VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) that VDP performs image development processing. A ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, and a CPU that controls the operation of the VDP based on various instructions (such as "liquid crystal control command" described later) from the effect control unit 24. A liquid crystal control CPU), a ROM (liquid crystal control ROM) that stores a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, and a RAM (liquid crystal) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of control RAM).
The liquid crystal control CPU controls the operation of the VDP (display drive operation of the liquid crystal display device 36) based on the instruction from the effect control unit 24, so that the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an image according to the instruction of the effect control unit 24. Is done.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 3 has a liquid crystal display CPU (CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40) on a substrate separate from the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24. Such a configuration is generally referred to as a "2 CPU" configuration. On the other hand, a configuration in which a CPU that performs the same function as the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit 40 is mounted on the effect control unit 24, that is, a configuration in which the effect control unit 24 also functions as the liquid crystal control unit 40 is configured as "1 CPU". Is called.

The effect control unit 24 is also an light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs in order to display various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable body effect by the movable body accessory). It is provided with an acoustic control unit for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive circuit: driver) for the movable body accessory motor 80c for operating the movable body (not shown), and the like.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory is connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation position of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, this is detected as an error.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the switch of the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, that is, the operation detection switch of the effect button 13 and the cross key 16, and the effect control unit 24 is operated from the effect button 13 and the cross key 16. Each detection signal can be received.

Based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 selects (determines) the effect pattern from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance by lottery or uniquely, and is required. By controlling various production means at the timing, the desired production is produced. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation and By developing the notice production etc. in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

Here, regarding the effect control command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (CPU201), and receives and analyzes the interrupt process. Specifically, the CPU 241 executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the above-mentioned input of the strobe signal, acquires an effect control command in the interrupt processing realized by the control program, and analyzes the command contents. Do.
At this time, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 performs the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt. The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting, and even if other interrupts occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed.

<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3-1. Design fluctuation display game]

Next, an outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, a symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. In, a "big hit lottery" is performed by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, specializes the result. Derived display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start port 34, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "missing" mode, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The variable display game is referred to as a "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol". The "special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started. Along with that, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the jackpot lottery result is "big hit"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". "Display state) is displayed as a stop.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A special game state (big hit game) occurs. In this big hit game, the number of game balls won by the opening door 52b until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) elapses or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (big winning opening). A predetermined number of winning balls to 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9) The "round game", in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number of winnings is reached, and the large winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, a maximum of 16). Round) Repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the jackpot has started is performed first, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, after the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the big hit is finished, so that the big hit game is finished.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, a lottery is made as to whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing". "Winning lottery (winning type lottery)" and if it is a "big hit", the big hit type is drawn, and if it is "missing", the losing type is drawn. )'And a big hit lottery (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because it is not necessary to perform a type lottery for the loss), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol In addition, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") to be finally stopped and displayed is determined according to the winning type.
Then, the main control unit 20 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) as the effect control command for specifying the processing state. It is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect" described later) is generated. In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "missing fluctuation pattern" in the case of a miss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a'reach fluctuation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of the reach effect described later, a'normal fluctuation pattern'that does not specify the occurrence of the reach effect, and the occurrence (overlap occurrence) of the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as a specified'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern', a'pseudo-ream normal variation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-ream effect and does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that specifies the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the production to be developed (the production scenario such as the advance notice production) and the decorative design to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop design) are determined, and the decorative design is changed and displayed according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special design. Run the symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45, LED, and the like are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)

Further, in the game machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs an "auxiliary hit lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or "○" and "○" and ". Of the LEDs expressing "x", the LED on the "○" side is in the lit state) to stop and display.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric opening game, a game in which the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or the lower starting port 35 is won by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41. Until the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the lower starting port 35 is closed, and the like is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, maximum). (Twice) It is supposed to be repeated.

(About hold)

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the jackpot game, the normal electric opening game, etc., the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, or the normal symbol start port 37 When a prize is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. This is used as data related to the start right of the variable display game, and is stored up to the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, up to 4), which is a predetermined upper limit value, except for those related to the variable display. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the reserved data, is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation-holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

[3-2. Game state]

The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of this embodiment, first, various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state. These game states are distinguished by the presence or absence of a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) (with electric support, without electric support).

The "electric chew support state" is a normal state in which the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening thereof) in the normal variable opening game is Refers to the "open extension state" that is more extended than. When the open extension state occurs, the open operation period of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is, for example, It is extended from 1 time in normal time to 2 to 3 times.
In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the lottery probability per auxiliary varies from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (usually). Along with the occurrence of the figure probability fluctuation state, the'normal symbol time reduction state'that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (normal symbol fluctuation display operation time) occurs (for example, from 10 seconds). It is shortened to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the normal electric opening game frequently occurs, and the operating rate is improved (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chew support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the case without it is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the "normal state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and a gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

In the "time saving state", the jackpot lottery probability is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation time) is higher than the normal state. It is a game state in which a'special symbol time reduction state'is generated and the electric chew support state is set. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

The "latent probability state" is a "special symbol probability change state" in which the jackpot lottery probability fluctuates to a high probability (for example, 1 / 39.9) higher than the above low probability, and is a gaming state without electric support (high). Probability + no electric support).

The "probability change state" refers to a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability has the same high probability as the latent probability state, but a special symbol time reduction state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, it becomes "high probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the game state, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability, when the game state is "normal state" and "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability state", and the game state is "latent state" and "probability change". In the case of "state", at least the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit, a big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big hit lottery probability and the presence / absence of the electric support are placed under the same low probability / no electric support game state as the above normal state.

[3-3. About hit]

Next, the "hit" in the game machine 1 will be described.
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big hit lottery (winning lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of hits. In the case of this example, the hit type includes, for example, each jackpot belonging to the jackpot type, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R".
The notation of "R" means the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or the game ball is displayed. A game that operates when a specific area in the winning opening is passed.

In the above probability variation state, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified number of STs) without winning the jackpot type, the high probability state is terminated and the probability shifts to a low probability. , So-called "number-cutting probability change machine (ST machine)", and when the specified number of ST times is completed, the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a type of "general probability change machine" that continues until the next big hit is won.
The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Further, the number of times of the time saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In addition, there is no particular limitation on what kind of hit is provided, and it can be appropriately determined.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "missing" as well as the jackpot type. Specifically, there are three types of outliers, "outlier 1", "outlier 2", and "outlier 3".
As described above, when the result of the winning lottery is "missing", the lottery of the losing type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3-4. About the production]
(Direction mode)

Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for displaying an effect related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, a normal effect mode, a time-saving effect mode, a latent effect mode, and a probabilistic effect mode are provided corresponding to each of the normal state, the time-saving state, the latent state, and the probabilistic state. In each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is displayed by different background effects so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he / she is currently staying in. It has become.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, an effect control command including game state information managed by the main control unit 20 side. Based on this, the current game state can be grasped and transition control can be performed between a plurality of types of effect modes in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. Specific effect control commands as described above include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)

Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, and variously related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled. Such a notice effect suggests (notices) the degree of expectation (hereinafter referred to as "winning expectation") of whether or not a player has won the winning type, and serves as a "fanning effect" to fuel the player's sense of expectation of winning. work. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", and "look-ahead notice production". The effect control unit 24 functions as a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) and controlling these effects.

The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, the final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. A mode of production. Reach effects include multiple types of reach effects associated with winning expectations. For example, there are cases where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect appears. Such a reach production is called a "super reach production". Many of these "super reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the normal reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects of super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 <super reach 2 <super". It has a relationship of "reach 3 <super reach 4".

The "pseudo-continuous effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo-continuous variation) of the decorative symbol, and the "pseudo-continuous variation" is one of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol variation display game. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times, such as temporarily setting a part or all of them in a temporarily stopped state and executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)" described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such a "pseudo-ream" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. It is easy to select a production to fuel expectations such as reach.

The "look-ahead notice effect" is mainly for the hold display mode and the destination of the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) that has not yet been used for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which the winning expectation level can be notified in advance before the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game by utilizing the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed in. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "revival effect", and "premier notice effect" are performed. It occurs and the game content is getting excited.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the “holding change advance notice effect” as an example of the pre-reading advance notice effect will be described.
In the case of the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, a display area for displaying the decorative symbol variable display game (a variable display effect of the decorative symbol and a notice effect are displayed). In the lower display area of the screen, there is a hold display area 76 (hold display units a1 to d1) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the special symbol 1 side, and a special symbol. A hold display area 77 (hold display units a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined holding display mode. In FIG. 4, the presence or absence of the operation holding ball is currently lit (with the operation holding ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or off (without the operation holding ball: the dashed circle in the figure). An example is shown in which information on the number of balls on hold is notified.

The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation hold ball (hold display) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is all the operations in the hold display. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation hold ball is generated, the main control unit 20 sends the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation hold balls including the operation hold ball generated this time). A "hold addition command" for designating the above is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 22).
In the case of the present embodiment, the hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the hold addition command makes it possible to specify the data on the upper byte side that can specify the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead determination and the look-ahead judgment information. It is composed of low-order byte side data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, a look-ahead about the reserved ball is made based on the fact that a prize is generated in the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 and a new reserved ball is generated. As a determination, a big hit lottery is performed for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control unit 20 holds and stores information representing the result of the jackpot lottery performed as such a look-ahead determination in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203.
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the look-ahead determination is used for selecting (lottery) the symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be paraphrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control unit 20 performs the look-ahead determination and holds and stores the "variation pattern selection information" obtained as a result in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command transmitted by the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the "look-ahead advance notice effect" as a part of the display control process related to the hold display based on the look-ahead determination information included therein. Performs production control processing related to. Specifically, a "look-ahead notice lottery" is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed, and if this is won, the look-ahead notice effect is displayed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically a jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. This is game information obtained by pre-reading and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. That is, this information includes at least information that pre-reads the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation (pre-reading winning information), and other information that pre-reads the symbol lottery result (pre-reading symbol information) and fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. Information for which the pattern is pre-read-determined (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information) can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the hold addition command includes the look-ahead winning information, the look-ahead symbol information, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated must be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation-holding ball is actually subjected to the fluctuation display operation. There is no. For example, if the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1" is typically described, in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1". It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the gist of the effect.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the look-ahead notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display. A "hold display change" that can change from white (normal hold display mode) to hold display (special hold display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) of the notice display. A look-ahead notice effect (also called "pending change notice") of "system" is performed.
FIG. 4 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in blue, green, red, and the Danger pattern means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the hold icon of the Danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning a big hit. It is a premium hold icon to be displayed.

(Direction means)

Various effects in the game machine 1 are expressed by the effect means provided in the game machine 1. The directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: Light effect means), sound generator such as speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound effect means), effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to a player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). The term "image display device" mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<4. Main control processing>

Subsequently, the processing performed by the main control unit 20 of the present embodiment will be described. The processing of the main control unit 20 is mainly a predetermined main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 5) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 18). And are included.

[4-1. Main control side main processing]

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control side.
The main processing on the main control side is started when a system reset occurs due to a system reset signal from the power supply board when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control, the watchdog timer function ( WDT) may be exerted and the CPU 201 may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation, such as initializing the register values of each unit including the CPU201. (Step S101).

(Initial setting process)

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of step S101.
In FIG. 6, when the above system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S201, and then sets the stack pointer value of the RAM 203 to the stack area as the stack pointer setting process in step S202. Executes the process to set according to the final address of. Then, in the following step S203, the RAM protection is invalidated, and the prohibited area in the out-of-designated area travel prohibition function of the RAM 203 is invalidated.

Next, in step S204, the CPU 201 executes a process for turning off the security signal, turning off the set value display, and turning off the firing permission signal. Here, the security signal is a signal output to the hall computer HC through the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame, and functions as a signal for notifying the hall computer HC of a status such as a setting change being changed. The setting value display OFF means turning off the display of the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
The launch permission signal is a signal output from the payout control board 29 to the launch control board 28 as described above, and the CPU 201 gives an instruction to the payout control board 29 to turn off the launch permission signal.
Here, the security signal OFF and the set value display OFF are measures for turning on / off the power while the setting is being changed. That is, since the power may have been turned off while the set value Ve is being displayed in the setting change process, the set value display and the security signal are temporarily turned off.

In step S205 following step S204, the CPU 201 executes a power supply abnormality check process.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the power supply abnormality check process, the WDT timer is cleared (step S11), and it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is ON (step S12). The power supply abnormality signal is a signal output from the power supply board, indicates that the power supply abnormality signal OFF is at a normal level, and indicates that the power supply abnormality signal ON is not at a normal level (that is, is abnormal). If the power supply abnormality signal is ON, the CPU 201 returns to step S101 shown in FIG. 5 and restarts the main processing on the main control side from the beginning. That is, when an abnormality is found in the power supply, the main processing on the main control side is reset.
Then, if the power supply abnormality signal is not ON, no abnormality is found in the power supply, so that the CPU 201 finishes the power supply abnormality check process.

Returning to FIG. 6, the CPU 201 performs various setting processes at startup in step S206 in response to the completion of the power supply abnormality check process in step S205. In the setting process of step S206, for example, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode, an internal hard random number setting process for activating an internal hard random number circuit, and the like are executed.

In step S207 following step S206, the CPU 201 sets the startup waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24). Then, the process of steps S208 to S210 waits for the set start-up waiting time to elapse. Specifically, after subtracting 1 from the set startup waiting time (step S208) and executing the power supply abnormality check process (step S209), if the startup waiting time is not zero (step S210: ≠ 0), step S208 Return to the processing of. By the standby process based on such an activation waiting time, the activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed.

In step S210, when the above-mentioned startup waiting time has elapsed (waiting time = 0), the CPU 201 proceeds to step S211 and transmits a standby screen display command to the effect control unit 24.
In response to this standby screen display command, the effect control unit 24 displays a predetermined screen display, such as a screen on which characters such as "Please Wait ...", are arranged on the liquid crystal display device 36 at the time of startup. Control to execute.

In response to the execution of the transmission process in step S211 the CPU 201 proceeds to step S212, and by the processes of step S212 and step S213, the payout control is performed while executing the power supply abnormality check process (S212: see FIG. 7). It waits for the power-on signal from the board 29 to be sent. This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the game operation is not started only by repeating the processes of steps S212 and S213. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted because the payout abnormality such as the prize ball not being paid out does not occur.
When the power-on signal is sent (step S213: ON), the CPU 201 ends the initial setting process in step S101.

(Processing after initial setting)

The CPU 201 proceeds to step S102 shown in FIG. 5 in response to the completion of the above initial setting process.
In step S102, the CPU 201 acquires the information of the input port n (that is, a predetermined input port) and copies it to the W register.
Here, the input port n is a 1-byte (8-bit) port, and in this example, the following signals are input. In addition, "b0" to "b7" shown below represent a bit position.

b0: Setting key (input signal from setting key switch 94)
b1: Out of supply detection signal b2: Counting error signal b3: Disconnection detection signal 1
b4: Disconnection detection signal 2
b5: Door open signal (detection signal of front door open sensor 61)
b6: RAM clear button (input signal from RAM clear switch 98)
b7: Power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal

Here, regarding the setting key of b0, "0" means the setting key switch 94 = OFF, and "1" means the setting key switch 94 = ON. Regarding the door opening signal of b5, "0" means the door is closed (front frame 2 is closed), and "1" means the door is opened. Further, regarding the RAM clear button of b6, "0" means RAM clear switch 98 = OFF (button non-operation state), and "1" means RAM clear switch 98 = ON (button operation state).

In step S103 following step S102, the CPU 201 masks the value of the W register. Specifically, the values required for determining the migration of the setting change processing (S115), RAM clear processing (at least S117 and S118), setting confirmation processing (S109), and backup restoration processing (S111) described below. The process of masking the values other than the setting key (b0), the RAM clear button (b6), and the door opening signal (b5) is performed.
As can be understood from the above explanation, the transition condition to the setting change process is that at the time of startup, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the operating state with the front frame 2 open. ing.
Further, in this example, the transition condition to the RAM clear processing is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is in the non-operation state and the RAM clear button is in the operation state at the time of startup.
Further, the transition condition to the setting confirmation process is that, in terms of operation, the setting key is in the operating state and the RAM clear button is in the non-operating state when the front frame 2 is open.
Further, the transition condition to the backup restoration process is that, in terms of operation, both the setting key and the RAM clear button are in the non-operation state at the time of startup.

FIG. 8 shows the correspondence between each determination condition on the operation side in shifting to the setting change processing, the RAM clear processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the backup restoration processing, and the value of the W register.
FIG. 8 shows the order of setting change processing, RAM clear processing, setting confirmation processing, and transition determination to backup restoration processing.
As shown in the figure, the judgment conditions for the transition to the first setting change process are: setting key: ON (setting key switch 94: ON), door opening: ON (front door opening sensor 61: ON), RAM clear switch 98. : ON, and therefore the value of the W register is conditioned on the 0th bit: 1, the 5th bit: 1, and the 6th bit: 1.
In the second determination of transition to the RAM clear process, it is determined whether or not the determination condition is the RAM clear switch 98: ON and the value of the W register is the 6th bit: 1. Here, in this example, the transition determination to the RAM clear process is executed when the transition condition of the setting change process is not satisfied. Further, in the transition to the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process, it is a condition that the RAM clear switch 98 is OFF. From these points, if the transition condition to the setting change processing is not satisfied and the RAM clear switch 98 is ON, it can be estimated that the transition operation to the RAM clear processing is being performed. Therefore, in this example, in the transition determination to the RAM clear processing as described above, in terms of operation, only whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON (6th bit: 1 or not) is determined. It is supposed to be.

In the judgment of transition to the third setting confirmation process, the judgment conditions are set key: ON, door open: ON, RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and therefore the W register value is the 0th bit: 1st and 5th bits. The condition is: 1, 6th bit: 0.
Further, in the determination of transition to the fourth backup restoration process, the determination conditions are set key: OFF and RAM clear switch 98: OFF, and therefore, the W register values are 0th bit: 0 and 6th bit: 0. It is a condition.

Here, regarding the backup restoration process, as the transition condition for performing only the backup restoration process without going through the setting confirmation process, the setting key: OFF and the RAM clear switch 98: OFF are described on the operation side as described above. However, the condition for whether or not to simply shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed is that the backup flag described later is ON (step S106). Refer to the judgment process of).

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The CPU 201 executes the setting change condition establishment determination process in step S104 in response to performing the mask process in step S103. Specifically, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not the masked value (3 bits) in step S103 is "111".
When the value after masking is "111" and an affirmative result that the setting change condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting change process in step S115. That is, a process for newly setting the set value Ve is performed according to the operation of the RAM clear button or the setting key.
The details of the setting change process in step S115 will be described later.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the detection signals by the setting key switch 94, the front door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98, in other words, each detection used in determining the transition to the setting change mode. A signal is input to the same input port of the main control unit 20, and it is collectively determined whether or not the value of each input detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition.
As a result, the number of determination processes for the determination of transition to the setting change mode can be reduced as compared with the case of individually determining whether or not the value of each detection signal satisfies a predetermined condition.

In response to the execution of the setting change process in step S115, the CPU 201 executes the RAM clear process in step S116. This RAM clear process is a setting for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the process of initializing the value in the predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203 and the end of the setting change process executed in step S115. It includes the process of sending the change end command, but the details will be described later.

Subsequently, in the previous step S104, if the value after masking by step S103 is not "111" and a negative result is obtained that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S105 and the RAM is abnormal. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is at least determined whether or not the "set value" stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is a value outside the range of use Ru (in this example, outside the range of "1", "2", and "6"). To do.
Here, as a value handled by the CPU 201 with respect to the set value Ve, there is a set value Vd. The set value Vd is a value corresponding to the set value Ve, which is a 1-byte value in this example, and is 00H so as to be able to express at least three stages corresponding to the above-mentioned usage range Ru. The values of (0) to 02H (3) are defined. In addition, "H" means a hexadecimal number (hereinafter, the same applies). In this example, the set value Vd = 00H represents the set value Ve = "1", the set value Vd = 01H represents the set value Ve = "2", and the set value Vd = 02H represents the set value Ve = "6". It is supposed to be. In the main control unit 20, the set value Vd is mainly handled as the "set value", and this set value Vd is stored in the storage area of the "set value" in the work area of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 20. ..
In the determination process of step S105, it is determined whether or not the set value Vd stored in the work area is a value in the range of 00H to 02H.

In step S105, when the set value is a value outside the above-mentioned usage range Ru (that is, outside the normal range) and it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the CPU 201 waits for the power to be turned on again after step S112. After that.
Specifically, in step S112, the CPU 201 gives an effect control command (setting) for instructing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be notified to re-turn on the power and change the setting as a command transmission process when the power is turned on again. A process of transmitting a change waiting command) to the effect control unit 24 is performed. If a RAM abnormality is detected at startup, the mode is forcibly shifted to the setting change mode and the change (setting) of the set value Ve is accepted. Therefore, in step S112, the CPU 201 first notifies the effect control unit 24 side that the setting change mode is to be entered by the setting change waiting command.
In response to the setting change waiting command, the effect control unit 24 executes a screen display on the liquid crystal display device 36 to prompt the setting change operation, such as a screen containing characters such as "Open the door and change the setting". Let me. At this time, the effect control unit 24 may perform control to display the corresponding light effect (for example, lighting of all LEDs in the light display device 45a) and the sound effect together with the screen display.

In step S113 following step S112, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, OFF), and then repeats the error display process of step S114. In the error display process of step S114, a process for causing the setting / performance indicator 97 to execute the error display is performed. This error display process is repeated until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, the processes after step S101 are executed again as the main process on the main control side. At this time, if the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed according to the above screen display or the like, the shift to the setting change mode is performed and the RAM abnormal state is resolved.

If it is determined in step S105 described above that the set value is not a value outside the range of use Ru and is not a RAM abnormality, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S106 to determine whether the backup flag is ON (in this example, the backup flag = 5AH). Is ON state) is determined.
In the game machine 1, when the power is cut off, the storage information of the RAM 203 is backed up by the power check / backup process (step S901, see FIG. 19) described later in the timer interrupt process on the main control side. If the backup process is properly performed when the power is cut off, the backup flag is turned on (see step S1010 in FIG. 19). Therefore, in step S106 described above, the backup flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the backup can be restored. Specifically, in step S106, it is determined whether or not the backup flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is not ON, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S112 described above. As a result, when the backup restoration condition is not satisfied, the transition to the setting change mode is forcibly performed as in the case where the RAM abnormality described above is recognized.

Here, as described above, the determination process in step S106 corresponds to the process of determining whether or not to shift to the state in which the backup restoration process is performed regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S106 that the backup flag is ON, the CPU 201 determines in step S107 whether or not the RAM clear condition (transition condition to the RAM clear process) is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1".
When the value of the 6th bit of the W register is "1" and an affirmative result that the RAM clear condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to the process in step S116 described above. As a result, the RAM clearing process described above is executed.

Here, as can be seen by referring to the route from step S107 to S116 described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to clear the RAM without changing the setting. This makes it possible to deal with cases where it is desired to clear data other than the data related to the set value Ve, such as the payout-related data in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S107, if the value of the 6th bit of the W register is not "1" and a negative result that the RAM clear condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S108 to confirm the setting (setting confirmation condition). It is determined whether or not the transition condition to the setting confirmation process) is satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the W register after masking in step S103 is "110".
When the value of the W register after masking is "110" and an affirmative result that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 executes the setting confirmation process in step S109 and proceeds to step S110. That is, the process shifts to the process for restoring the backup.
The details of the setting confirmation process in step S109 will be described again.

On the other hand, if the value of the W register after masking is not "110" and a negative result that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied is obtained, the CPU 201 passes the setting confirmation process in step S109 and proceeds to step S110. ..

In step S110, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined effect control command corresponding to the backup return to the effect control unit 24 as a command transmission process at the time of backup return.

In step S111 following step S110, the CPU 201 performs a backup restoration process.
The backup restoration process is a process of restoring the operation after the power is turned on and before the power is turned off, based on the stored contents of the RAM 203 backed up when the power is turned off. Specifically, the CPU 201 returns the stack pointer before the power is cut off, and performs a process for starting the game operation from the processing state when the power is cut off.
Further, in the backup restoration process, the power failure restoration display command (OB03H) for issuing the information display instruction corresponding to the backup restoration is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in the main loop preprocessing in step S119 described later. Therefore, the process of storing the lower byte data of the power failure recovery display command in the register is executed.

When the backup restoration process in step S111 is executed, or when the RAM clear process in step S116 described above is executed (that is, when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are executed, or when only the RAM clear process is executed). , CPU 201 proceeds with step S117 processing.

In step S117, the CPU 201 sets the CTC for periodically generating a timer interrupt at predetermined time intervals such as 4 ms.
By performing the setting process in step S117, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output thereafter, and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is executed.

In the following step S118, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command for instructing the start of the game to the effect control unit 24, then proceeds to step S119 to execute the main loop preprocessing, and then step S120. Executes the main loop processing of.
The main loop preprocessing in step S119 will be described later.

(Main loop processing)

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing in step S120.
In the main loop process of FIG. 9, the CPU 201 sets itself in the interrupt disabled state in step S601, and executes the random number update process in the subsequent step S602. In this random number update process, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game (random numbers related to the jackpot lottery circulating in a predetermined numerical range by the increment process (special symbol determination used for the symbol lottery). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers related to the lottery for auxiliary hits (random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment used in the winning lottery for auxiliary hits) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment) , Initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment) and random number for fluctuation pattern used for selection of fluctuation pattern are updated.

In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various random number counters used for a symbol lottery related to a big hit lottery, an auxiliary hit lottery, a variable pattern lottery, etc., a random number counter for special symbol determination, a counter for generating an initial value, and a special symbol determination A random number counter for, a random number counter for determining auxiliary hits, a counter for generating initial values, a random number counter for determining auxiliary hits, a random number counter for fluctuation patterns, and the like are provided. These counters serve as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. In the random number update process of step S602, the above-mentioned special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters that generate the initial values of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated, and the above various types are described. Generate soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern is "0 to 238", a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the random number for the fluctuation pattern of the RAM 203, and the acquired value is used. After adding "1", it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding "1" to the acquired value is "239", "0" is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other random number counters for initial value generation are updated in the same way.

When the random number update process in step S602 is completed, the CPU 201 performs a process of saving the values of all the registers in step S603, and then performs a performance display monitor aggregation division process in step S604.
This performance display monitor aggregation division process is a process for calculating a value as the performance information described above (here, for example, a value as the “normal time ratio information” described above). As described above, the value of the normal time ratio information is calculated by using the total number of payouts and the total number of out balls, but the CPU 201 has a winning opening (upper start opening 34, Calculated based on the result of counting the number of game balls that won in the lower start opening 35, general winning opening 43, and large winning opening 50). For the total number of out balls, the number of game balls discharged from the out opening 49 is used. Obtained by counting.
The number of winning balls and the number of out balls are counted in the input management process (see step S904 in FIG. 18) described later in the timer interrupt process on the main control side. The CPU 201 calculates the value as the normal time ratio information in step S604 based on the count values of the count of the number of winning balls and the count of the number of out balls performed on the timer interrupt processing side in this way. As described above, the calculated value as the normal time ratio information is stored in the predetermined area (measurement information storage area) of the RAM 203.
The value of the normal time ratio information calculated in this way is displayed on the setting / performance indicator 97 by the performance display monitor display process (see step S916 in FIG. 18) described later in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In step S605 following step S604, the CPU 201 performs all register reset processing, sets itself in the interrupt enabled state in the following step S606, and then returns to step S601.

As described above, in the main loop processing of step S123, the processing of steps S601 to S606 is repeated in an infinite loop. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S601 to S606 except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

(Setting change processing)

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S115.
In this setting change process, a process for setting the set value Ve based on the operation and an effect control command for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting change is completed (completed) are sent to the effect control unit 24. Processing for transmission is performed.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first executes a process of transmitting a setting changing command (BA76H) to the effect control unit 24 in step S401.
In response to this setting changing command, the effect control unit 24 displays on the liquid crystal display device 36 a screen display for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as a screen on which characters such as "setting is being changed" are arranged. Processing is performed so that the sound can be output from the speaker 46 while the setting is being changed. Further, at this time, the effect control unit 24 may light a predetermined LED (for example, all LEDs) in the light generating means (light display device 45a) described above according to a predetermined lighting pattern.
The processing executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to the various effect control commands transmitted by the CPU 201 in connection with the setting change, including the command during the setting change, will be described later (FIG. 52A, etc.).

In the following step S402, the CPU 201 sets the backup flag to 00H (that is, the OFF state), and then sets the system operation status = 2 in the step S403. This system operation status is information for at least identifying whether or not the system has passed the setting change process of step S115 at the time of startup, and "2" indicates that the setting change process has been performed, and is other than "2". Indicates that the value (for example, "0") does not go through the setting change process.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 5, in this example, there are cases where both the setting change process and the RAM clear process (S116) are executed, and the case where only the RAM clear process is executed without executing the setting change process. Although the clear process (program) is shared, by using the above system operation status, it is possible to execute the process separately in the former case and the latter case while sharing the RAM clear process program. ..

In step S404 following step S403, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring a set value. Specifically, the set value Vd (any of 00H to 02H in this example) stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired.

In the processing after step S405 following step S404, the display value on the setting / performance indicator 97 is updated according to the progressive operation of the set value Ve (operation of the RAM clear button), or the setting change completion operation (setting key operation) is performed. It is a process for setting the set value Ve according to the operation).
First, the CPU 201 decrements the acquired set value Vd by 1 in step S405 (“set value -1”), and determines whether or not the set value Vd is larger than 1 in the following step S406 (set value> 1”. ). In this example, since the maximum value of the set value Vd is 02H, it is not determined that the set value> 1 in step S406, which is executed for the first time after the start of the setting change process.
In step S406, if the set value Vd is not larger than 1, the CPU 201 sets the carry flag in step S407 (after turning it ON), and then increments the set value Vd by 1 in step S408 (“set value +1””. ), And it is determined in step S409 whether or not the carry flag is ON. If the carry flag is ON, the CPU 201 executes the setting change command acquisition process in step S411, and transmits the setting change command to the effect control unit 24 by the subsequent command process in step S412.
The command for changing the setting will be described later.
Then, in response to executing the command transmission process in step S412, the CPU 201 executes the output management process in step S413. By this output management process, the set value Ve corresponding to the current set value Vd is displayed on the setting / performance display 97. The details of the output management process in step S413 will be described later.

In step S414 following step S413, the CPU 201 determines whether the setting key is OFF, that is, whether the setting key switch 94 is OFF, and if the setting key is not OFF, the change switch, that is, in step S415. It is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 98 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 98 is not ON, the CPU 201 re-executes the output management process in step S413.
By the processing of steps S413 to S415, the CPU 201 waits until either the setting key or the change switch is turned ON, and during the standby, the setting / performance display 97 displays the current set value Ve by the processing of step S413. Repeat the process for.

If the change switch is ON in step S415, the CPU 201 returns to step S406.
Here, if the set value Vd (set value Vd that was being set up to that point) acquired at the start of the setting change process in step S115 is 02H, it is determined in step S415 that the change switch is ON. In the process of step S406 executed accordingly, a determination result that "set value>1" is obtained (because it is -1 in step S405 but +1 in step S408). The set value Vd should be returned to 00H according to the change operation (progressive operation) performed while the set value Vd is 02H. Therefore, if it is determined in step S406 that "set value>1", the carry flag set process in step S407 is passed, and the process proceeds to step S408. As a result, since the carry flag is determined to be OFF in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410 and the set value Vd is returned to 00H (“set value ← 0”).
The CPU 201 proceeds to step S413 via the processes of steps S411 and S412 in response to returning the set value Vd to 00H in step S410. That is, in this case, the set value Ve (“1” in this example) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.

By the above processing, during the setting change, the set value Vd is cyclically changed within the range of 00H to 02H (within the usage range Ru) according to the change operation, and corresponds to the changed set value Vd. The set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance display 97.

Further, the setting change command transmitted in step S412 is a command for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd being selected during the setting change process, and the selected setting value. It is a command that stores information representing Ve.
By the series of processes of steps S406 to S415 described above, every time the selected set value Ve is switched by the progressive operation of the set value, a setting change command reflecting the changed set value Ve is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Will be.
Although the description by illustration is omitted in FIG. 10, the CPU 201 uses the set value offset conversion table described later in acquiring the set value Ve corresponding to the set value Vd (see FIG. 16).

If it is determined in step S415 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S416 to execute a process of saving the set value Vd. That is, the process of storing the set value Vd in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 203 is executed.
The CPU 201 ends the setting change process in step S115 in response to the execution of the save process in step S416.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the output management process in step S413.
First, the CPU 201 executes the security signal output process in step S501. Specifically, a process is performed so that a security signal is output to the hall computer HC through the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame.
In the following step S502, the CPU 201 executes a process of outputting 0 to the LED common port, that is, the LED common port as the setting / performance indicator 97, and then acquires display data from the 7-segment decoding table in step S503. Execute the process. That is, it is a process of acquiring display data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “6”) based on the set value Vd.
When 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the setting / performance indicator 97 is in the display OFF state (non-display state), the significance of which will be described later.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a 7-segment decoding table, and FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the segment configuration and the segment display pattern in the setting / performance display 97.
The 7-segment decoding table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.

In this example, the seven segments of the setting / performance indicator 97 are numbered by numerical values 0 to 6 as shown in FIG. 13A. The setting / performance display 97 is provided with a DP (dot point) display unit (light emitting unit) together with these seven segments 0 to 6, and the DP display unit is numbered “7”. ing.
As the 7-segment display data, a total of 10 data are prepared, from the display data of "SEG_0" representing the numerical value "0" to the display data of "SEG_9" representing the numerical value "9". The display data is 1 byte (8 bits) of data, and when the least significant bit position is the first bit position, the first bit position is the display / non-display of the segment "0" (light emission / non-light emission). Represents. After that, similarly, the second bit position is the segment "1", the third bit position is the segment "2", the fourth bit position is the segment "3", the fifth bit position is the segment "4", and the sixth bit position. The bit position of is the display / non-display of the segment "5", and the 7th bit position is the display / non-display of the segment "6".
Further, in the display data in this example, the eighth bit position represents the display / non-display of the DP (“7”).

In the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12, the corresponding display data, specifically, the display data of SEG_1, SEG_2, and SEG_6 are acquired from the set values Vd = 00H, 01H, and 02H, respectively. It is configured.
Specifically, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, an area for storing display data for each set value Vd of at least 00H to 05H is secured, such as the address areas of "6203" to "6208" in the figure. The display data SEG_1 (“06” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is set in the second area in the uppermost area (the area of the address with the youngest number) in this area. The display data SEG_2 (“5B” in the figure) corresponding to Vd = 01H is stored, and the display data SEG_6 (“7D” in the figure) corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H is stored in the third area.
In this example, the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H are for display. Although "00" is stored as data, its significance will be described again.
Further, in the 7-segment decoding table of this example, display data SEG_E ("79") for displaying "E" indicating a setting value error is stored in the 7th area. It is possible to notify the set value error through the setting / performance indicator 97 in response to the case where the set value Vd shows an abnormal value such as the set value Vd is a value outside the usage range Ru. ..

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The CPU 201 performs a process of outputting the display data acquired from the 7-segment decoding table by the process of step S503 to the setting / performance display 97 in step S504.
Subsequent steps S505 to S508 are processes for dynamically lighting (intermittently lighting) the LED for displaying the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97. Specifically, in step S505, the CPU 201 increments the LED counter by 1, and in the subsequent step S506, determines whether or not the 0th and 1st bits (lower 2 bits) of the LED counter are "11". Here, the lower 2 bits of the LED counter become "11" when the increment process of step S505 is performed a multiple of 4.
If the 1st and 0th bits of the LED counter are "11" in step S506, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S507, outputs data for designating a segment for displaying the set value to the LED common port, and displays the LED counter in step S508. Executes timer count processing. By executing the output process in step S507, the setting / performance indicator 97 displays the set value Ve based on the display data output in step S504. Then, this display state is continued for the time of the display timer in step S508 (4 ms in this example).

The output management process shown in FIG. 11 ends in response to the execution of the process of step S509 following the timer count process of step S508, and the process proceeds to step S414 shown in FIG. If the change switch is ON, the output management process of step S413 is repeated. As described above, since 0 is output to the LED common port in step S502, the lighting state of the LED for setting value display started in the process of step S507 is canceled by the execution of step S502. Since the LED counter is incremented by 1 in step S505, it is determined in step S506 that the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter are not "11", the output processing in step S507 is passed, and the timer count processing in step S508 is performed. Will be executed. That is, after the process of step S507 is executed and the LED for displaying the set value is turned on for a period of at least 4 ms, until the 0th and 1st bits of the LED counter become "11" again, that is, in this example. The LED is turned off for at least 4 ms × 3 = 12 ms.
In this way, dynamic lighting is realized in which the LED for displaying the set value is intermittently lit at a predetermined cycle.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation process in step S509 in response to executing the timer count process in step S508.
This input data creation process is executed by calling, for example, the same process in step S902 in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). As will be described later, the input data created by the input data creation process includes the input data of the RAM clear switch 98 indicating the presence / absence of the progressive operation of the set value Ve and the setting key switch indicating the presence / absence of the setting change completion operation. Contains 94 input data.
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 10, the determination of the presence / absence of the setting change completion operation (S414) and the determination of the presence / absence of the progressive operation of the set value Ve (S415) are executed after the output management process of step S413. Therefore, by executing the input data creation process in step S509, the data required for these determination processes can be obtained in advance.

(RAM clear processing)

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the RAM clearing process shown in FIG.
First, the CPU 201 executes the in-region RAM initialization process in step S601. The initialization process of step S601 is a process of initializing (clearing) the value in the predetermined area (used area) including the work area in the RAM 203. However, in the initialization process of step S601, the storage area of the set value Vd in the work area is excluded from the initialization target.

The above-mentioned performance information is stored in an area outside the used area in the RAM 203, and therefore is not cleared by the initialization process in step S601.
The data to be cleared in the RAM clearing process is data in the RAM area (normal data storage area) such as various flags, timers, and counters required for normal game progress. These data include, for example, the following. That is, data related to the game state designation (a game state flag that specifies the current game state such as a normal state, a probability change state, a time saving state, and a latent state), and a flag that specifies whether or not a winning game is in progress (conditional device). Operation flag), various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds, maximum number of rounds, etc.), data related to the big hit lottery result (big hit judgment flag: winning lottery result information, special symbol judgment data: symbol lottery result information) , Manages hold data related to operation hold balls (number of operation hold balls, various random number values used for big hit lottery, various random number values used for auxiliary hit lottery, random number for fluctuation pattern), special symbol operation status, game progress Timer (special symbol accessory operation timer), input / output data related to switches and sensors, various winning counters that count the number of winning balls in the winning opening, flags that specify the presence or absence of electric support status (open extension flag), electric power Electric support count counter that counts the remaining number of support, counter that counts the remaining number of high probability state (special figure probability variation counter, normal figure probability variation counter), various error flags (excluding RAM error flag), and payout related Data etc. In any case, when the RAM clear process is executed, all the data other than the specific data (set value Vd and performance information) are set to the initial state.

Here, as understood from the above description of FIG. 5, when the setting change process (S115) is executed, the process proceeds to step S116 and the RAM clear process is executed.
In the setting change process, the set value Vd can be changed. When the set value Vd is changed, the stored values other than the set value Vd in the work area of the RAM 203 may be inconsistent with the changed set value Vd. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed, the area other than the set value Vd in the work area is cleared (initialized) by executing the RAM clear process.

In response to the execution of the initialization process of step S601, the CPU 201 sets 30s in the RAM clear notification timer in step S602 and also executes a process for setting a deviation in the present special figure. The RAM clear notification timer is a timer for setting the RAM clear notification time executed by the effect control unit 24 in response to the RAM clear command transmitted in the process of step S803 of FIG. 17, which will be described later, and is 30 s in this example. To set. Further, the present special figure referred to here means, for example, the above-mentioned special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In step S603 following step S602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the system operation status described above is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change process of step S115 has been performed after the startup.
If the system operation status is "2", the CPU 201 executes the process corresponding to the case of passing through the setting change process in steps S604 to S612.
If the system operation status is not "2", the CPU 201 proceeds to step S613 to store the lower byte data of the RAM clear command in the register, and ends the RAM clear process in step S116.
The operation of storing the lower byte data of the command in the register as described above functions as an operation of designating the command type to be transmitted in step S804 of the main loop preprocessing (FIG. 17) described later.

When passing through the setting change process, the CPU 201 first resets the system operation status to "0" in step S604, executes the acquisition process of the setting change end command (BA77H) in step S605, and then executes the command in step S606. The setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the transmission process.

The processes of steps S607 to S612 following step S606 are processes related to the display of the set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
First, in step S607, the CPU 201 outputs data for designating the set value display segment to the LED common port, and in the following step S608, the display data corresponding to the set value Vd is output from the 7 segment decode table (see FIG. 13). After executing the process of acquiring and adding DP to the display data in step S609, that is, the process of setting the value of the 7th bit position of the display data to "1", the display data is output by the output process of step S610. Output to the setting / performance indicator 97.

The processes of steps S612 and S613 following step S611 are processes for continuing the display state of the set values Ve and DP on the setting / performance indicator 97 for a predetermined time (1s in this example). Specifically, the CPU 201 repeatedly executes the display timer count process in step S612 (for example, the timer count process having a cycle of 4 ms similar to that in step S508 (see FIG. 11)) until it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed. To do.

If it is determined in step S612 that 1 s has elapsed, the CPU 201 executes the storage process of step S613 and ends the RAM clear process of step S116.

As can be understood from the above description, when the setting change process of step S115 is executed and the setting change completion operation is performed (step S412: Y in FIG. 10), the RAM clear process of step S116 The setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (S605, S606), and a notification that the setting change is completed is given.
In the case of this example, the setting change end command notifies the effect control unit 24 that the setting change has been completed, and does not provide the function of notifying the setting value Ve set in the setting change process. ..
In this example, the set value Ve set in the setting change process is notified to the effect control unit 24 by the set value command transmitted in the process of step S808 of FIG. 17 (main loop preprocessing) described later.

(Setting confirmation process)

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process in step S109.
The setting confirmation process is a process for confirming and displaying the set value Ve that is being set.
In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first sets 30s in the fraudulent information timer in step S701. The fraud information timer is a timer for managing the output time of the above-mentioned security signal to the hall computer HC.
In the following step S702, a process of acquiring the current set value information is performed. That is, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM is acquired.

In step S703 following step S702, the CPU 201 executes a process of acquiring the set value data from the set value offset conversion table.

FIG. 16 shows an example of a set value offset conversion table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20.
In the set value offset conversion table, the set value Vd (00H to 02H) is set to the set value Ve ("1".
It functions as a table for converting the identification data ("SETNUM1" to "SETNUM6") of "2" and "6").
In the case of this example, the set value offset conversion table has an area for storing the identification data of the set value Ve for at least each set value Vd of 00H to 05H, such as the address areas of "6215" to "6220" in the figure. The identification data (“00” in the figure) of the set value Ve “1” corresponding to the set value Vd = 00H is set to the set value Vd = 01H in the uppermost area in this area. The identification data (“01” in the figure) of the corresponding set value Ve “2” is the identification data (“05” in the figure) of the set value Ve “6” corresponding to the set value Vd = 02H in the third area. It is stored.
In this example, the set value is set in the fourth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 03H, the fifth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 04H, and the sixth area corresponding to the set value Vd = 05H. "00" is stored as the identification data of Ve, and its significance will be described again.

In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 acquires the above-mentioned identification data as “set value data” by the acquisition process in step S703.

In response to the execution of the acquisition process of step S703, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting checking command (BA6xH) in step S704, and then sends the setting checking command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S705. Send.
In the acquisition process of step S704, the CPU 201 performs a process of including the setting value data acquired in step S703, that is, the identification data for identifying the set value Ve being set in the currently set value, in the setting checking command.
As a result, when the command transmission process in step S705 is executed, the effect control unit 24 is notified that the setting is being confirmed and the current set value Ve.

The processes of steps S706 and S707 following step S705 are processes for displaying the current set value Ve on the setting / performance indicator 97.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first executes a process of acquiring set values and DP data in step S706. That is, the process of acquiring the current set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 and the DP data (“1”) in the setting / performance display 97 is executed. Then, the output management process of step S707 is executed. The output management process in step S707 is the same process as the output management process in step S413 shown in FIG. As a result, the setting / performance display 97 in this case displays the value representing the current set value Ve and the DP.

In step S708 following step S707, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key is OFF (the setting key switch 94 is OFF), that is, whether or not the end instruction operation of the setting confirmation display has been performed, and the setting key must be OFF. If so, the output management process of step S707 is executed again. As a result, after the setting confirmation command is transmitted in step S705, the process of step S708 waits until the end instruction operation of the setting confirmation display is performed, and during the standby, the setting / performance is set and performed by the process of step S707. The process of displaying the current set values Ve and DP on the display 97 is continuously performed.

When it is determined in step S708 that the setting key is OFF, the CPU 201 executes the acquisition process of the setting confirmation end command (BA67H) in step S709, and issues the setting confirmation end command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of the subsequent step S710. The transmission is performed, and the setting confirmation process in step S109 is completed.

(Main loop pre-processing)

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main loop preprocessing in step S119.
In the main loop pre-processing, the CPU 201 first executes the initialization command acquisition process in step S801, and then transmits the initialization command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process in step S802. The initialization command is a command for instructing the initialization (returning to the origin) of the movable body accessory motor 80c that operates the movable body as an accessory.

In step S803 following step S802, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring transmission command data from the acquired lower byte command, and transmits the acquired command data to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S804.
Here, in the acquisition process of step S803, the data of the command in which the lower byte data is stored in the register is acquired in the process of the process that has passed after the startup. Specifically, when passing through the RAM clear process in step S116 (when both the setting change process and the RAM clear process are performed, or when the setting change process is not performed and only the RAM clear process is performed), The data of the RAM clear command (BA02H) is acquired. On the other hand, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed (when both the setting confirmation process and the backup restoration process are performed, or when the setting confirmation process is not performed and only the backup restoration process is performed), the power failure is restored. The data of the display command (OB03H) is acquired.
As a result, the effect control unit 24 is configured to execute different processes when the RAM clear process is performed and when the backup return process is performed.

In step S805 following step S804, the CPU 201 executes a process for transmitting the reserved number of special figures 1 and 2. Here, in the process of step S805, when the backup restoration process of step S111 is performed, the reserved numbers of special figures 1 and 2 are transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the RAM clear process of step S116 is performed. In that case, the pending quantity is not transmitted (because the information on the reserved quantity is cleared).

The processes of steps S806 to S808 following step S805 are processes for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the current set value Ve by the set value command.
First, in step S806, the CPU 201 performs a process of acquiring the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as a process for acquiring the current set value information, and in the subsequent step S807, the set value offset conversion table ( The process of acquiring the set value data from FIG. 16) is executed. Specifically, the identification data of the set value Ve (“1”, “2”, “5”) corresponding to the set value Vd (00H to 02H) acquired in step S806 is acquired.
Then, the CPU 201 performs the acquisition process of the set value command (F6xxH) in the following step S808, and transmits the set value command to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process of step S809.
In the acquisition process of step S808, the set value command including the identification data acquired in step S807 is acquired. By such a setting value command, the current setting value Ve can be notified to the effect control unit 24.

In response to the command transmission process of step S809, the CPU 201 executes the internal function register setting process, that is, the register setting process for initial setting of various functions such as the hardware random number counting function in step S810, and steps. In S811, the process of setting the performance display monitor lighting timer to 5s is executed. The performance display monitor lighting timer is a timer for managing the operation time of the operation confirmation lighting operation (blinking operation for 5 seconds in this example) at the time of starting the setting / performance indicator 97.

Further, in step S812 following step S811, the CPU 201 resets the system operation status to "0", and in step S813, turns on the launch permission signal for the payout control board 29. In response to this, the payout control board 29 determines that the launch is permitted, outputs the permission signal to the launch control board 28, and allows the launching device 32 to launch the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be launched by the launch operation handle 15.
Here, the configuration in which the payout control board 29 receives the launch permission signal from the main control unit 20 and allows the launch operation, that is, the launch permission instruction information from the main control unit 20 is indirectly transmitted through the payout control board 29. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which a launch permission signal by the main control unit 20 is directly output to the launch control board 28 may be used. ..
The CPU 201 ends the main loop pre-processing in step S119 in response to the execution of the processing in step S813.

(Advantages of setting value display data table and setting value conversion table as an embodiment)

Here, in the present embodiment, like the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 contains a data table including a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value. Is stored.
Then, in this data table, the set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the set value Vd (“00H” to “02H”) that can be set by the setting change process (see FIG. 10). A certain first set value related information and a second set value related information which is the set value related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to a set value that cannot be set by the setting change process are included. Specifically, as the first set value related information, "00", "01", and "05" stored in the addresses "6215", "6216", and "6217" in the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 correspond to each other. As the second set value related information, "00", "00", and "00" stored in the addresses "6218", "6219", and "6220", respectively, correspond to each other.
Further, in the data table, as the first set value related information, at least specific information regarding the set value Ve representing the stage with the lowest winning probability (that is, "00" in the address "6215") is stored, and the second setting is made. The same information as the specific information is stored as the value-related information.

When the set value Vd is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value Vd stored in the RAM 203 to a value representing the lowest stage.
However, if the data is tampered with after rewriting, the corresponding information may be acquired from the data table based on the unsettable setting value Vd, and the operation according to the unsettable setting value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, it is impossible to acquire information according to the set value Vd that cannot be set from the data table, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and the fairness of the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, 0 is stored as the above-mentioned specific information.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the establishment of fraudulent acts by falsifying the set value by a simple method of writing the specific information = 0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment decoding table shown in FIG. 12 is also set value-related information selected when the main control unit 20 refers to the set value Vd that can be set by the setting change process. Second setting value related information which is the setting value related information selected when the setting value related information (addresses "6203" to "6205") and the setting value which cannot be set by the main control unit 20 are referred to by the setting change process. (Addresses "6206" to "6208") are included. Then, in the 7-segment decoding table, 0 is stored as the information related to the second set value.
As a result, even if the data table is referred to by the set value Vd that cannot be set in the setting change process due to fraudulent activity or some malfunction, it is set in the set value display means (setting / performance indicator 97 in this example). It is possible to prevent the value display from being performed. Specifically, in this example, since the data of "00", that is, "00000000000" is acquired as the display data, all the segments "0" to "6" in the 7-segment display for setting value display are hidden. As a result, the numerical display is not performed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous display of the set value.

[4-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]

The timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
The main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 18, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first executes the power supply check / backup process in step S901. In this power check / backup process, the power level supplied from the power supply board is mainly monitored, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored. A backup process or the like for storing predetermined game information at the time in the RAM 203 is performed.

(Power check / backup process)

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the power supply check / backup process in step S901.
In the power supply check / backup process, the CPU 201 reads the power supply abnormality signal output from the power supply board twice in step S1001, and determines whether or not both read values match in the subsequent step S1002. If both values do not match, the process returns to step S1001 and the power supply abnormality signal is read twice again.

If both values match in step S1002, the CPU 201 determines in step S1003 whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (the power supply abnormality signal is OFF = normal level, ON = not normal level).
If the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level (step S1003: OFF), the CPU 201 turns off the backup flag in step S1004, clears the power supply abnormality confirmation counter in the following step S1005, and ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. That is, when it is confirmed that the power supply abnormality signal is at a normal level, the backup processing described below is not performed and the timer interrupt processing is continued.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is not at the normal level in step S1003 (step S1003: ON), the CPU 201 increments the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter by 1 in step S1006, and then the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is changed in step S1007. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value = natural number of 2 or more: for example, “2”).
If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 ends the power supply abnormality check process in step S901. That is, if a state in which the power supply abnormality signal is not at a normal level is detected but is not continuous detection, the backup process is not performed and the timer interrupt process is continued.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the CPU 201 performs the backup process shown in steps S1008 to S1011.
Specifically, the CPU 201 first clears the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (S1108), turns off the launch permission signal (S1009), and then turns on the backup flag (S1010).
Further, the CPU 201 transmits a power off command to the effect control unit 24 (S1011), and proceeds to the process in step S1012.

In step S1012, the CPU 201 performs a process of enabling RAM protection and invalidating the prohibited area.
The RAM protect is a rewrite prevention function for the RAM 203 due to a malfunction or erroneous operation. By enabling RAM protection, only data can be read from RAM 203, and data cannot be written.
Further, the prohibited area is an area corresponding to the designated area in the IAT (prohibition of traveling outside the designated area) function, and by setting the prohibited area to invalid, the IAT reset will not occur thereafter.

In step S1013 following step S1012, the CPU 201 clears the value of the output port, stops the timer interrupt processing in the subsequent step S1014, sets itself to the interrupt disabled state, and shifts to the infinite loop processing.
In this infinite loop, the CPU 201 is reset by the WDT, and shifts to the operation stop state due to the loss of the operating power supply.

The description returns to FIG.
In FIG. 18, when the power check / backup process in step S901 is completed, the CPU 201 executes the input data creation process in step S902. Specifically, input data is created from various sensors and switches based on input information (ON / OFF signal and rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)).
The input information here is, for example, from a winning detection switch such as an upper starting port sensor 34a, a lower starting port sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, a large winning port sensor 52a, a general winning port sensor 43a, and an OUT monitoring switch 49a. ON / OFF information of the output switch signal (winning detection information) and ON / OFF information of the switch signal output from the switch related to the setting operation of the set value Ve such as the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 (operation). Information), a status signal from the payout control board 29 (ON / OFF information of the front door opening sensor 61 and the fullness detection sensor 60), and the like. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected at the out opening or each winning opening is monitored for each interrupt.

After completing the input data creation process in step S902, the CPU 201 executes a timer management process for managing the timer used for the game operation control in step S903. Here, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 are updated (subtracted).

Next, the CPU 201 performs an input management process in step S904. In this input management process, the values of the winning counter, the OUT ball monitoring counter, and the like are updated based on the input data created in the input data creation process (S902). The "winning counter" is a counter provided for each winning opening and counting the number of winning game balls (number of winning balls). The OUT ball monitoring counter is a counter that counts game balls (out balls) discharged from the out port 49.
The input management process of step S904 functions as an input management means for managing input signals (detection signals) from various winning opening sensors.

In step S905 following step S904, the CPU 201 executes a setting abnormality check process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 confirms the set value error flag in step S1101. The set value error flag is a flag that is set (turned on) by the process of step S1103 described below when an abnormality of the set value Vd is recognized, and in this example, "5AH" means an ON state. ..

If the set value error flag is "5AH" (ON state) in step S1101, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905. That is, the fact that the set value error flag is determined to be ON in step S1101 means that the set value error command (command for instructing the effect control unit 24 to execute the set error notification) is already executed in step S1104 described later. Therefore, the setting error check process is completed without sending the setting value error flag again.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed in step S1101 that the set value error flag is not "5AH" (OFF), the CPU 201 has in step S1102 whether the set value Vd is within the normal range (within the range of 0 to 2). Judge whether or not. Specifically, the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is in the range of "00H" to "02H".

If the set value Vd is within the normal range, the CPU 201 ends the setting abnormality check process in step S905.
If the set value Vd is not within the normal range, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1103 to set the set value error flag (ON state), and in the following step S1104, a setting for indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the set value Vd. A value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is completed.
Here, the set value error flag includes step S1308 (setting error determination at the time of winning) of FIG. 22, which will be described later, and step S1501 (setting error determination at the time of jackpot random number determination at the start of fluctuation) in FIG. 24. It is used in step S1701 (determination of setting error when performing fluctuation pattern lottery at the start of fluctuation) in FIG. 28.

Here, in response to the above-mentioned set value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs a process for notifying the data abnormality of the set value Ve. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is subjected to a process of displaying an image including a display such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member."
In the game machine 1, a setting error (setting value error) can be canceled by performing a setting change operation.

The description returns to FIG.
When the CPU 201 finishes the setting abnormality check process in step S905, the CPU 201 executes the error management process in step S906. In this error management process, the presence or absence of an error is monitored based on the input data related to various sensors and the status signal from the payout control board 29.
When an error occurs, the CPU 201 performs the error processing, and if the error type requires the transmission of an error command, the CPU 201 transmits the corresponding command to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error command, it executes error notification according to the error type. Further, when the error being generated is resolved, the CPU 201 transmits an error canceling command to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this error release command, the executing error notification is terminated.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 201 executes a random number management process in the timer interrupt that periodically updates the random numbers related to each variation display game. Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and each time the random number counter goes around. In addition, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

In step S908 following step S907, the CPU 201 executes the prize ball management process. In this prize ball management process, the above-mentioned winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command, and executes the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the normal symbol management process in step S909. In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (random number acquisition process), and store the game information as hold data (operation hold ball related to a normal symbol) up to the maximum number of hold balls (hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, a lottery for the auxiliary hit based on the operation holding ball is performed, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the lottery result for the auxiliary hit, and the stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal). Stop symbol) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing.

Further, the CPU 201 executes the normal electric accessory management process in step S910. In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electric accessory management process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c, whereby the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, the CPU 201 executes a special symbol management process in step S911. In this special symbol management process, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in the special symbol fluctuation display game, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) and the special stop symbol are performed. The processing required for the special symbol variation display game, such as the determination of, is executed.
The details of the special symbol management process in step S911 will be described again.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the special electric accessory management process in step S912. In this special electric accessory management process, setting processing necessary for executing and controlling the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit, the hit game (big hit game) corresponding to the hit type is executed and controlled.
Specifically, the solenoid control data is set for the large winning opening solenoid 52c, the number of rounds is counted (in the case of a big hit), the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 50 and the opening time are monitored. When the winning game is completed, the transition setting of the game state based on the game state at the time of winning and the winning type is performed.

Further, here, a plurality of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. At the start of the jackpot, the start of the round game, the end of the round game, the end of the maximum number of rounds, etc., it is time to send the jackpot start command, round start command, round end command, jackpot winning command, and jackpot end command, respectively. Send according to. The jackpot start command includes the hit type information this time, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side determines a series of hit effect scenarios developed during the hit game. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of winning the hit, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the hit game ends, and the effect control unit 24 side hits. It is used when determining the production mode after the game. Therefore, since this "big hit end command" can specify the game state after the end of the hit game, it plays a role as a game state designation command for designating the game state.

When the process for proceeding with the game up to step S912 is completed, the CPU 201 performs the external terminal management process in step S913. In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the game machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external centralized terminal board 21. The operation state information includes, for example, game information such as hit game occurrence information, symbol variation display game execution start information, prize number / prize ball number information, and error information.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the LED management process in step S914. In this LED management process, the output of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is controlled for LED indicators such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the setting / performance indicator 97. The control signal based on the display data created by the normal symbol management process (step S909), the special symbol management process (step S911), etc. is output to the corresponding display device or display in this LED management process, and the display control is performed. Will be done. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 39a are realized.

In step S915 following step S914, the CPU 201 saves the values of all the registers and then performs the performance display monitor display process in step S916. That is, it is a process for displaying the value as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information on the setting / performance display 97.
As mentioned earlier, in the case of this example, the value of the normal time ratio information is recalculated every time the number of out-balls in all states reaches a predetermined specified value, and the setting / performance indicator 97 is the current normal value. It is possible to display the time ratio information and the previous normal time ratio information (normal time ratio information whose calculation is completed at the latest recalculation timing). Therefore, in the display process of step S916 in this case, a process of displaying the values as the normal time ratio information of these two types on the setting / performance indicator 97 is performed.
The current value of the normal time ratio information is a value calculated in the process of step S604 in the above-mentioned main loop process (FIG. 11), and the value of the previous normal time ratio information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Then, the CPU 201 reads out the stored value and displays it on the setting / performance display 97.

Next, the CPU 201 restores the values of all the registers in step S917, clears the WDT count value in step S918, and ends the main control side timer interrupt process.

When the above timer interrupt processing is completed, the CPU 201 executes the main loop processing (S123) until the next timer interrupt is generated.

[4-3. Processing related to special symbol fluctuation display game]
(Special symbol management process)

Next, the processing of the main control unit 20 related to the special symbol variation display game will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol management process (step S911) described above. As described above, the special symbol management process is executed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 18, and is mainly used for the big hit lottery in the special symbol variation display game and the lottery result. Based on the special symbol variation pattern (look-ahead variation pattern and variation pattern at the start of variation), the special stop symbol is determined.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs the special symbol 1 start port check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) in step S1201, and then performs the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side) in the subsequent step S1202. Special figure 2 The start port check process is performed.
The details of these start port check processes will be described again with reference to FIG. 22.

After completing the start port check processing in steps S1201 and S1202, the CPU 201 determines the state of the condition device operation flag in step S1203. This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (for example, 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (for example, 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (≠ 5AH), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress, the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol operation status branching process in step S1204, and the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) is set according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). Processes related to the variable display operation are performed (steps S1205, S1206, S1207).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the jackpot game is in progress (= 5AH), the CPU 201 proceeds to the special symbol display data update process of step S1208 as it is without performing the process related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S1205-S1207. That is, when the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed (the display state of the special symbol of the special symbol display device is maintained in the state of being confirmed and displayed after the big hit). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and the status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S1204, depending on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. , Execute the corresponding processing respectively.

Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a special symbol change start process (step S1205) when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", and special when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)". The symbol changing process (step S1206) is executed, and when it is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S1207) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a waiting state for the next fluctuation, and the above-mentioned "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" means that the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop (confirmation) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time).

In the special symbol changing process in step S1206, it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, an effect control command is issued. As a result, the process of transmitting the "fluctuation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)". (Storing 03H in the special symbol operation status) Performs processing and the like. The above-mentioned "fluctuation stop command" is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended. By this variation stop command, the effect control unit 24 has terminated the special symbol variation display game after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Grasp that (end) and stop and display the decorative design that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game ends. Further, the above-mentioned "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned confirmed display time has elapsed, and if the confirmed display time has elapsed, it is considered that the current special symbol variation display game has ended. If the symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) and this special symbol fluctuation display game is a big hit, the process required to start the jackpot game (big hit symbol stop) Various setting processing of time) is performed. In various setting processes when the jackpot symbol is stopped, various settings such as clearing the jackpot determination flag, turning on the condition device operation flag, and setting the game state to the same game state as the normal state as the process before shifting to the jackpot game. Perform processing.
Further, in the special symbol confirmation time processing in step S1207, when the game state is updated, a process of transmitting a "game state designation command" including the game state transition information to the effect control unit 24 is performed. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that the game state has changed by the game state designation command.

By the processing of steps S1205, S1206, and S1207 described above, a fluctuation display operation in which the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the special symbol are set as one set is realized.
The details of the special symbol variation start processing in step S1205 will be described again with reference to FIG. 23.

When any of the processes of steps S1205 to S1207 is completed, the CPU 201 executes the special symbol display data update process of step S1208. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, 7-segment display data during the special symbol change is created, and the special symbol must be changing. For example, data for 7-segment display during special symbol stop display is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b by the LED management process (step S914) of FIG.

The CPU 201 finishes the special symbol management process in step S911 in response to the execution of the update process in step S1208, and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S912 shown in FIG.

(Special figure 1 Start port check process)

The special drawing 1 start port check process (step S1201) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.
This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. In the special figure 1 start port check process in this example, a prize is generated at the upper start port 34 as a pre-start process (process at the time of winning on the special figure 1 side) for executing the special symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side. The processing of adding the number of operation-holding balls on the special figure 1 side, the storage processing of various random numbers (holding storage processing), the transmission processing of the holding addition command, and the like are executed.
The special figure 2 start port check process (step S1202) also plays a role as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, like the special figure 1 start port check process, and is on the special figure 2 side. As a pre-start process (process at the time of winning a prize on the special figure 2 side) for executing the special symbol variation display game 2, the process of adding the number of pending balls on the special figure 2 side due to the occurrence of a prize at the lower start port 35, Various random number storage processes, hold addition command transmission processes, and the like are executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process have substantially the same processing contents. In the following, the special figure 1 start port check process will be mainly described, and the details of the special figure 2 start port check process will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate description.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1301 whether or not a winning (winning ball) to the upper starting port 34 is detected.
When the CPU 201 detects that the upper starting port 34 has won a prize, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1302 to determine whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball") is 4 or more. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls in Special Figure 1 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of holding storage balls (here, the upper limit is 4). However, if the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S1301: N), the special drawing 1 starting port check process of step S1201 is completed without doing anything.

When the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is 4 or more in step S1302, that is, when the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected but the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is 4 or more, the CPU 201 goes to step S1311, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is not 4 or more (less than 4), 1 is added to the number of balls held in the special figure 1 (step S1303), and the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the CPU 201 acquires various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time. Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random value values as hold data are special. Until the symbol 1 is subjected to the variable display operation (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These hold storage areas are provided with hold 1 storage area to hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of hold storages: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and each of them can store hold data for the maximum number of hold storages. It has become.

In step S1305 following step S1304, the CPU 201 determines the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT:) as the winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating the hold addition command. "01H") is acquired.
Next, in step S1306, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the “special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition” is satisfied. The special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

When the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1311 without executing the look-ahead determination process (step S1309) related to the look-ahead determination. In this case, the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "01H") specifies the look-ahead prohibition, and the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation hold ball of this time is prohibited, and as a result, the look-ahead notice is given. The production will not be executed either. In other words, it can be said that the read-ahead prohibition data specifies that the look-ahead determination process (step S1309) has not been executed.

In this example, the pre-reading determination of the special figures 1 and 2 is not performed regardless of the gaming state, but whether or not the pre-reading is prohibited is determined based on the current gaming state. The reason is as follows.
If you are in a game state with'with electric support', which is advantageous for right-handed hitting (time saving state, probability change state), winning of the lower starting port 35 frequently occurs, but it is advantageous for left-handed hitting. In the game state with "no electric support" (normal state, latent state), the lower starting port 35 is hardly won and the upper starting port 34 is frequently won. In consideration of the above, the look-ahead judgment of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed in the dark clouds regardless of the game state, but the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is made when the time saving state or the probable change state of'with electric support'. Is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is allowed, and when the normal state or latent state of'no electric support'is reached, the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is made. Is tolerated.

In step S1306, if the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied, the CPU 201 refers to the set value error flag (flag set in the setting abnormality check process in step S905) in step S1307, and sets error in the following step S1308. Whether or not (whether or not the set value error flag is ON state: 5AH) is determined.
If there is a setting error, the CPU 201 assumes that an abnormality (setting value data abnormality) has occurred, and proceeds to step S1311 without executing the look-ahead determination process (step S1309). Details will be described later, but if an abnormality in the set value Vd is found in the processing at the time of winning, a hold addition command including read-ahead prohibition data (01H) is transmitted without causing a RAM error, and a start port check in step S1201 is performed. You will exit the process.

On the other hand, if there is no setting error, the CPU 201 executes the look-ahead determination process in step S1309. In this look-ahead determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is pre-read and determined. Therefore, a series of "pre-reading winning judgment" for pre-reading the winning lottery result, "pre-reading symbol judgment" for pre-reading the symbol lottery result, and "pre-reading fluctuation pattern judgment" for pre-reading the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Processing is included.

Specifically, in step S1309, the CPU 201 first acquires the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (determination random number storage area), and the big hit determination random number value and the "big hit determination random number determination table" described later are used. Based on the above, a winning lottery (at least a pre-reading winning judgment that determines whether a big hit or a miss is made) is performed for the operation pending ball, and the result (referred to as "pre-reading winning result") is obtained.

In the present embodiment, the set value Vd is used for the winning determination (winning lottery), and a specific method of the winning determination as the present embodiment based on such a set value Vd will be described later. Since the winning determination is also performed in the processing at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (FIG. 23), the specific method of the winning determination will be described again at the time of explaining the processing at the start of the fluctuation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading winning result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being captured in the predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201. This is because the pre-reading winning / winning determination result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol determination processing, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

Further, in step S1309, the CPU 201 prepares a symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result (at least whether it is a hit or a miss) and the special symbol type (special figures 1 and 2) as the process of determining the pre-reading symbol. Perform the symbol lottery used. Specifically, the CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery (lottery of the winning type) for the current operation pending ball based on the special symbol determination random value acquired in the previous step S1304 and the symbol table, and the result (“Lottery of winning type) is performed. (Referred to as "look-ahead symbol result") is acquired. Judgment values (winning areas) for determining the symbol type are defined in the "symbol table" of the present embodiment, and are displayed as stop symbols depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. The type of special symbol to be used is determined.
If there are a plurality of types of deviations as in this example, a deviation type table for determining the types of deviations is provided. If there is only one type of loss, the loss symbol table is unnecessary.
Here, in this example, it is assumed that the out-of-order symbol table for drawing out the out-of-order type is used in the symbol determination in response to the fact that there are a plurality of out-of-order types of "out of place 1", "out of place 2", and "out of place 3". To do.
Further, in this example, as described above, there are at least four types of hits, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R", which are provided separately from the above-mentioned outlier symbol table. Based on the hit symbol table, among these four types of hit types, the type of special symbol corresponding to the hit type according to the random value for determining the special symbol is determined.

Here, for a part or all of the above-mentioned symbol table, a symbol table in which different symbol selection rates are set according to the set value Ve may be provided. For example, with respect to the jackpot symbol table, a table having a different selection rate for the jackpot type (for example, six types of jackpot symbol tables corresponding to the six settings) can be provided for each of the settings 1 to 6. For example, it is conceivable to determine the table contents so that the ball ejection performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the setting becomes higher. Of course, the jackpot symbol table common to each setting may be used. Further, the symbol table used in step S1309 is also used for the process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).

The CPU 201 does not store the pre-reading symbol result in the RAM 203 while being captured in a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU 201, as in the case of the pre-reading winning / failing determination described above. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM 203.

After completing the pre-reading symbol determination, the CPU 201 executes the pre-reading variation pattern determination. In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (in this example, it represents any of "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", "probability variation 10R", "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3"). Then, a lottery of the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the look-ahead symbol result and the random number for the fluctuation pattern acquired in step S1304 is performed, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is pre-read and determined.

In this example, the fluctuation pattern table is also used in the fluctuation pattern lottery performed in the processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 23).
A specific example of the fluctuation pattern table described above and a lottery process of the fluctuation pattern using the table will be described again at the time of explaining the processing at the start of fluctuation.

The look-ahead variation pattern determination result (winning command data (EVENT)) is immediately used in the hold addition command creation process in step S1310 described below, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, the CPU 201 finishes the process of step S1309 without storing the result of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination in the RAM 203 and taking it into the register.

In response to the execution of the look-ahead determination process in step S1309, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1310 and creates data on the lower byte side of the hold addition command according to the look-ahead determination result. Specifically, data representing the type of look-ahead fluctuation pattern is created as winning command data (EVENT) on the lower byte side of the hold addition command.
Regarding the EVENT data, "01H" set in step S1305 is updated to a value corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (value obtained in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process) in this process.

When the creation process of step S1310 is completed, the CPU 201 creates data on the upper byte side of the hold addition command according to the number of operation hold balls in step S1311. That is, data representing the current number of pending balls and the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result (special symbol type) is created as winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side of the pending addition command.
Regarding the data of the MODE, 1 hold of the special figure 1 to 4 holds of the special figure 1 and 1 hold of the special figure 2 to 4 holds of the special figure 2 are set so as to be identifiable.

In response to the execution of the creation process of step S1311, the CPU 201 performs the transmission process of the hold addition command in step S1312. That is, a hold addition command including the winning command data created in steps S1310 and S1311 as EVENT and MODE, respectively, is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Here, if the read-ahead prohibition condition is met (Y in S1306) or if an abnormality in the set value Vd is found in the determination process of the previous step S1308, the CPU 201 performs the read-ahead prohibition data (lower byte = 01H) described above. Is kept as it is without updating, and a hold addition command with read-ahead prohibited data is sent.
Further, at the time of overflow (when a new prize is generated while the maximum number of pending storages has been reached), the pending addition command for which the overflow is specified is transmitted (see the processing route of Y in step S1302). ).

After being sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the "look-ahead notice effect" related to the current operation hold ball. However, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, the CPU 201 exits the special figure 1 start port check process in step S1301 and then performs the special figure 2 start port check process in step S1302 without storing the hold addition command in the RAM 203.

Here, as described above, in this example, even if an abnormality occurs in the data of the set value Vd at the time of winning (when the operation holding ball occurs), the holding addition command is transmitted, but this holding addition command is , Since it is a command with pre-reading prohibition data, even if the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the set value Ve or the pre-reading advance notice effect not based on the set value Ve is configured to be able to appear, the effect related to the pre-reading advance notice. Since the control itself is prohibited, the look-ahead notice due to the defect does not appear, and there is no disadvantage to the player, so that no particular problem occurs. If the look-ahead notice effect is not prohibited, even though the set value Ve is abnormal, if a high-expected hold display appears in the hold display system look-ahead notice effect, subsequent RAM error processing If the game progress is stopped due to (error processing caused by an abnormal setting value), the player's expectation of winning disappears at once, leading to a great distrust of the game machine. However, in the case of this example, as described above, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

(Special symbol change start processing)

Subsequently, the special symbol variation start process (step S1205), which is the process at the start of the variation, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1401 whether or not the number of balls on hold in special drawing 2 is zero, and if the number of balls on hold in special drawing 2 is not zero, the process proceeds to step S1403, and this time. The processing (steps S1403 to S1412) at the start of the fluctuation is performed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball used for the fluctuation display.
On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is zero, the CPU 201 determines in step S1402 whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is zero, and when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not zero, Proceeding to the process of step S1403, the process (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for the current variation display is performed.
By the processing of the above steps S1401 and S1402, which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is preferentially digested). ) "Priority change order" is determined. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested. That is, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed with priority over the special symbol variation display game 1. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned priority variation type, and the operation-holding balls may be digested in the order in which the winning balls are won.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball is zero, the state is "no operation-holding ball". This "no operation hold ball" state is a case where a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that this state has been entered and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is switched and controlled to display a demo screen for waiting for customers (demo screen for waiting for customers). Therefore, when it becomes "no operation hold ball", the process proceeds to step S1413, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". ..

If the special symbol operation status is "waiting (01H)" in step S1413, the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status). Then, as the effect control command, a "demo display command" for displaying the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S1415), and the special symbol variation start process of step S1205 is completed.
After that, if it is "waiting (00H)" when the determination process of step S1413 is executed, the special symbol variation start process is completed without transmitting the demo display command again. The reason for doing this is that if the demo display command is sent without any conditions when the number of pending balls is zero, the demo display command is repeatedly sent at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of reserved balls is zero. This is to prevent unnecessary transmission from occurring in consideration of the fact that the control burden increases unnecessarily.

If the effect control unit 24 does not receive any effect control command (for example, hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demo display command, the effect display operation is performed. Is not performed for a certain period of time (waiting for customers), and the demo screen for waiting for customers is displayed.

When the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls is not zero in step S1401 and when the number of special figure 1 operation hold balls is not zero in step S1402 (the special figure 2 operation hold ball number is zero while the special figure 1 operation hold ball is zero). In each of the cases (when the number is not zero), the CPU 201 performs processing (steps S1403 to S1412) related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display.
Here, regarding the processes of steps S1403 to S1412 described below, if the determination in step S1401 is'NO', the process for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the determination in step S1402 above. If it is "NO", the processing is performed for the special symbol 1 operation holding ball, but since the processing method is the same, the operation on the special symbol 1 side is performed unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description. The process will be described without distinguishing between the process for the reserved ball and the process for the operation-held ball on the special symbol 2 side.

In step S1403, the CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of operation-holding balls (the number of operation-holding balls related to the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1), and in the following step S1404, the operation-holding ball number information after the subtraction is included. The "hold subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the remaining number of operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls is digested, and shifts the hold display currently being displayed.

Next, the CPU 201 sets the special symbol operation confirmation data in step S1405. This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time. For example, if the special symbol 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H (special symbol 1 fluctuation start designation)" is displayed. If the special symbol 2 is on the fluctuation start side, "01H (special symbol 2 fluctuation start designation)" is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol operation confirmation data storage area) of the RAM 203.

Next, the CPU 201 shifts the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 in step S1406, and clears the hold 4 storage area in the subsequent step S1407. In the processing of steps S1406 to S1407, the pending data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern) stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the reserved storage number n = 1 are used. (Random number) is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of RAM 203, and the hold storage area (hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage) corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored. The hold data stored in the area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S1406), the hold 4 storage area is cleared, and a free area is provided (step S1407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number of operation-holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it becomes possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, in step S1408, the CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a variable number remaining designation command and a game state command. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the "electric support count counter" that counts the remaining number of times with electric support is zero, and if there is a remaining time reduction number, the "variation" including the remaining time reduction number information. The "number remaining number designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. By this "variation number remaining number designation command", the effect control unit 24 side can execute the process of grasping the remaining time reduction number and notifying the remaining time reduction number information.
Further, in step S1408, a process of transmitting a game state command for designating the current game state to the effect control unit 24 is also performed.

Next, the CPU 201 executes the variation management process in step S1409.
In this fluctuation management process, a jackpot lottery corresponding to the start of fluctuation, a symbol lottery for stopped symbols, and a lottery of fluctuation patterns are performed. Further, in the fluctuation management process, an abnormality determination of the set value Vd is performed, and when an abnormality is found in the data of the set value Vd, an effect control command (RAM abnormality command) for notifying the effect control unit 24 of the setting error. ) Is sent.
The details of the fluctuation management process in step S1409 will be described again with reference to FIGS. 24 to 33.

When the variation management process in step S1409 is completed, the CPU 201 stores 5AH (ON state) in the special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) that specifies that the variation is being displayed in step S1410. The "special symbol N changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is being changed, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH). Indicates that the target special symbol is changing, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the target special symbol is stopped.
The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, in step S1411, the CPU 201 executes the command transmission process at the start of the fluctuation. In this command transmission process, in order to notify the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern selected in the variation management process of step S1409, the effect control command includes "variation" including variation pattern information capable of specifying the variation pattern content. A "pattern designation command" is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.
Further, in the command transmission process, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result in step S1409 and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The decorative symbol specification command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that specifies the special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (EVENT) that specifies the winning type. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the winning type, the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component) and It is used when deciding the combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.
Further, in the command transmission process, a set value command for notifying the effect control unit 24 side of the current set value Ve is also transmitted. By this set value command, the effect control unit 24 side can display a different type of effect according to the current set value Ve, or change the appearance rate of a predetermined effect.

Then, in the following step S1412, the CPU 201 switches to the special symbol operation status "changing (02H)" (stores 02H in the special symbol operation status) as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, and determines the random number storage area for determination and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. Performs the process of clearing the storage area.

In response to the execution of the change start time setting process in step S1412, the CPU 201 ends the special symbol change start process in step S1205. When the CPU 201 finishes the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S1208) of FIG. 21 is performed, whereby the variation display of the special symbol is started.

(Variation management process)

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation management process in step S1409.
In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines in step S1501 whether or not there is a setting error. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value error flag is in the ON state (5AH).

If it is determined in step S1501 that the setting error flag is OFF and not a setting error, the CPU 201 executes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 and then proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.
The jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 selects (determines) the jackpot / miss winning type by lottery based on the jackpot determination random number (internal lottery random number), the jackpot determination random number determination table, and the set value Vd. is there.
The details of the jackpot random number determination process as the embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

If the CPU 201 determines in step S1501 that a setting error has occurred, the CPU 201 passes the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 and proceeds to the symbol lottery process in step S1503.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error occurs (when a determination result of Y is obtained in step S1501), the jackpot random number determination process is not performed unless the setting error is resolved.
As described above, the setting error can be cleared by performing the setting change operation. That is, when a setting error state occurs, the setting change operation is performed to cancel the setting error state, so that the state returns to the state in which the jackpot random number determination process is performed.
As described above, the setting value abnormality command for enabling the setting change operation is transmitted in the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 20).

In the symbol lottery process of step S1503, the CPU 201 performs a process of determining the hit / miss type (stop symbol type) based on at least the winning lottery result (big hit determination flag), the special symbol determination random number, and the symbol table. Do. Then, the result (special symbol determination data) is stored in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area) of the RAM 203. As a result, the winning type (win / miss type) related to this special symbol variation display game is determined.
As with the symbol lottery process at the time of pre-reading determination, the symbol lottery can be performed according to the set value Vd.

In step S1504 following step S1503, the CPU 201 is subjected to the current variation display operation as the variation pattern lottery process, based on at least the symbol lottery result (the above special symbol determination data), the random number for the variation pattern, and the variation pattern table. A process of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation for the operation-holding ball by lottery is performed.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery process in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery using the set value Vd and the number of operation hold balls (the number of operation hold balls obtained by subtracting the digested amount this time) is performed.
The details of the variable pattern lottery process in the present embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

In response to the execution of the variation pattern lottery process in step S1504, the CPU 201 ends the variation management process in step S1409. That is, after this, the process proceeds to step S1410 shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, in this example, the lottery results of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation are stored in the RAM 203. The reason is that these lottery results are the fluctuation management process of step S1409. This is data that is used not only in the special symbol management process (step S911: see FIGS. 18 and 21) to which the special electric accessory management process belongs, but also in the special electric accessory management process (step S912: see FIG. 18) later. Is.
This point is different from the process at the time of pre-reading determination in which the lottery result is not stored in the RAM 203.

Although the description by illustration is omitted, in the variation management process of step S1409, when the winning lottery result is a winning, as a setting process for shifting the gaming state, the gaming state after the winning game is specified. Perform the necessary setting processing (game state transition preparation processing).

(Big hit random number judgment processing)

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot random number determination method of the embodiment.
Prior to the detailed description of the jackpot random number determination process according to FIG. 25, the jackpot random number determination method adopted in the embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, as a premise, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number can take 65536 values from 0 to 65535. In the jackpot random number determination in the present embodiment, the determination reference value TH is determined within the range of values that such a jackpot determination random number can take, and based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the determination reference value TH. Judge big hit / miss. As an example, in this example, when the value of the random number for jackpot judgment is within the range of "0 to judgment reference value TH", the jackpot judgment result is obtained, and in other cases, the deviation judgment result is obtained. There is.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number determination corresponds to a low probability time (normal state: hereinafter abbreviated as "low probability time") and a high probability time (probability change state: hereinafter abbreviated as "high probability time"). Two types of judgments corresponding to the above are performed. Therefore, as the determination reference value TH, two types are set: the determination reference value TH1 used for the determination at the time of low accuracy and the determination reference value TH2 used for the determination at the time of high accuracy.
As illustrated in FIG. 26, the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is larger than the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, whereby the probability of winning a big hit is increased in the judgment at the time of high accuracy. ing.

In the case of this example, since the jackpot random number is determined according to the set value Ve, different values are prepared for each set value Ve as the determination reference value TH. As a specific example, for the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy, the value corresponding to the set value Ve "1" (BIGLMAX1), the value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGLMAX2), and the set value Ve "6". (BIGLMAX6) is prepared, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy also corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (BIGHMAX1), the value corresponding to the set value Ve "2" (BIGHMAX2), and A value (BIGHMAX6) corresponding to the set value Ve "6" is prepared. The judgment reference value TH1 (= 842) at the time of low accuracy and the judgment reference value TH2 (= 8249) at the time of high accuracy shown in FIG. 26 exemplify the values (BIGLMAX1, BIGHMAX1) corresponding to the set value Ve “1”, respectively. are doing.
In this example, the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is BIGLMAX1 <BIGLMAX2 <BIGLMAX6, and the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high probability is BIGHMAX1 <BIGHMAX2 <BIGHMAX6. The higher the setting, the higher the winning probability.

In this example, in the actual determination process, a "judgment lower limit value" (corresponding to "BIGMINI-1" described later) is also used as a threshold value for the random number value. First, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", and if the random number value is not larger than the "judgment lower limit value", a judgment result of loss is obtained. When the random number value is larger than the "judgment lower limit value", the jackpot determination using the above-mentioned determination reference value TH1 and the determination reference value TH2 is performed.
When the "judgment lower limit value" is set to "0", the jackpot judgment condition is that the random number value is within the range of "0" to "judgment reference value TH". On the other hand, if the "judgment lower limit" is set to a value larger than "0"(let's say X), the jackpot judgment condition is that the random number value is within the range of "X" to "judgment reference value TH". Become.

Based on the above premise, the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first acquires the setting difference information from the big hit determination random number determination table in step S1601.

FIG. 27 illustrates a random number determination table for jackpot determination used in the jackpot random number determination process, FIG. 27A is a random number determination table for jackpot determination for special figure 1, and FIG. 27B is for jackpot determination for special figure 1. An example of a random number judgment table.
As the jackpot random number determination process, a determination process for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A and a determination process for special figure 2 using the table shown in FIG. 27B are performed. Since the same processing is performed by the common processing shown in FIG. 25, only the determination processing for special figure 1 using the table shown in FIG. 27A will be described below as a representative.

In step S1601, the setting difference information means a variable stored in the current reference destination address in the table shown in FIG. 27A, and the reference destination address is set at the start of the jackpot random number determination process shown in FIG. 25. Since it is the start address of the table, the CPU 201 acquires the variable represented by "000H" stored in the start address as the setting difference information.
In the following step S1602, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting difference information is other than "000H". If the setting difference information is "000H" and a negative result is obtained in step S1602, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1603 to acquire the determination reference value. That is, the variable (variable represented by "BIGMIN-1") stored in the address next to the start address in the table shown in FIG. 27A is acquired as the determination reference value. This process corresponds to the process of acquiring the above-mentioned "decision lower limit value".
Next, in step S1604, the CPU 201 performs a process of shifting to the designated address. Specifically, the above-mentioned reference destination address is shifted from the current reference destination address (“4093” in FIG. 27A) to the address four ahead (“4097” in FIG. 27A).
Then, in step S1610, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the random number value (value of the random number for jackpot determination) is larger than the determination reference value.
The series of processes of steps S1601 → S1602 → S1603 → S1604 → S1610 described above corresponds to the process of determining whether or not the random number value is larger than the above-mentioned determination lower limit value.

In step S1610, if the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1611 to acquire the small hit information.
Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the judgment lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”), the variable represented by “000H, 000H, 000H” at the next address of the judgment lower limit value. Is stored. The variables correspond to "low probability medium big hit information", "high probability medium big hit information", and "small hit information" in order from the left side.
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”) in step S1610, the CPU 201 is stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
In the hit information, "05AH" represents "hit" and "000H" represents "missing".

In step S1612 following step S1611, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability change is in progress, and if it is not in the probability change, the low probability medium jackpot information is acquired in step S1613, the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502 is completed, and the probability change is in progress. If so, the high-accuracy medium-big hit information is acquired in step S1614, and the big-hit random number determination process in step S1502 is completed.
Here, if the low-accuracy medium-big hit information acquisition process in step S1613 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”), In step S1613, the CPU 201 acquires the leftmost "000H" of the hit information variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value ("BIGMIN-1").
Further, regarding the high-accuracy medium-big hit information acquisition process in step S1614, the process in step S1614 is executed in response to the determination in step S1610 that the random number value is not larger than the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”). In this case, the CPU 201 acquires the central “000H” of the hit information variables “000H, 000H, 000H” stored at the next address of the determination lower limit value (“BIGMIN-1”).

By the above-mentioned series of processing, when the random number value is equal to or less than the judgment lower limit value, the information of the deviation is acquired.

Subsequently, when it is determined in step S1610 that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value, the CPU 201 returns to step S1601 and acquires the setting difference information from the jackpot determination random number determination table.
When the process of step S1601 is executed in response to the determination that the random number value is larger than the determination lower limit value in step S1610, the above-mentioned reference destination address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. As the setting difference information, "001H" stored in the reference destination address is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, in the subsequent step S1602, a determination result that the setting difference information is other than "000H" is obtained, and the CPU 201 proceeds to the process in step S1605.

The process of steps S1605 to S1609 is a process related to the acquisition of the determination reference value TH according to the set value Ve. First, the process related to the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.
Specifically, in step S1605, the CPU 201 acquires the set value Vd stored in the work area of the RAM 203 as the process of acquiring the set value information, and corrects the set value information acquired in the subsequent step S1606 by 2 bytes. That is, in this example, the set value Vd, which is set to 1 byte, is corrected to 2 bytes.
Next, in step S1607, the CPU 201 acquires a determination reference value according to the set value Ve based on the correction information, that is, the set value Vd corrected by 2 bytes.
When step S1607 is executed for the first time after the start of the jackpot random number determination process in step S1502, the reference destination address is "4097" shown in FIG. 27A. In the process of step S1607, the judgment reference value (that is, in this case, "BIGLMAX1" of the address "4098" and "BIGLMAX2" of the address "4099" are stored in the address deviated from the reference address according to the above correction information. "Any of" BIGLMAX6 "of the address" 4100 ") is acquired. Specifically, in this case, if the above correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "1" (set value Vd = "00H"), "BIGLMAX1" at the address next to the reference address is acquired, and "BIGLMAX1" is acquired. When the correction information corresponds to the set value Ve "2" (set value Vd = "01H"), "BIGLMAX2" at the address two ahead of the reference address is acquired, and the correction information is the set value Ve. When it corresponds to "3" (set value Vd = "02H"), "BIGLMAX6" at the address three ahead of the reference destination address is acquired.

In response to the acquisition of the determination reference value in step S1607, the CPU 201 goes through the processes of steps S1608 → S1609 (these processes will be described later) to determine whether or not the random number value is larger than the determination reference value in step S1610. judge. As a result, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed.

If a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, it is a jackpot), the above-mentioned steps S1611 and subsequent steps are performed. The process is executed, and the hit information acquisition process is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the judgment reference value TH1 (“BIGLMAX1”, “BIGLMAX2”, “BIGLMAX6”) at the time of low probability is stored as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH1 at the time of low probability is used. Variables represented by "05AH, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address of the area ("4098" to "4100"). Represents "big hit information" and "small hit information").
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH1 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random value in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 is among the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH1 as described above in the process of step S1613. The leftmost "05AH" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" of the variables "05AH, 05AH, 000H" of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614.

Here, in step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy was performed, and the random number value was larger than the determination reference value TH1 (that is, the determination at the time of low accuracy was "missing"). In this case, the jackpot determination is performed using the determination reference value TH2 (“BIGHMAX1”, “BIGHMAX2”, “BIGHMAX6”) at the time of high accuracy. At this time, the reference destination address is the address “4097” shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the start address of the information storage area (“4097” to “4101”) for jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy. Therefore, it should be shifted to the address "4103", that is, the start address of the information storage area ("4103" to "4107") for the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy.
If the set value Ve is in 3 steps, the amount of address shift is 6 addresses from "4097" to "4103", but if the set value Ve is in 6 steps, the amount of deviation in the table is low. In the information storage area for jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1, not only "BIGLMAX1", "BIGLMAX2", and "BIGLMAX6" but also "BIGLMAX3", "BIGLMAX4", and "BIGLMAX5" are stored. That is, in this case, the amount of address shift should be 9 addresses corresponding to the increase of the determination reference value TH1 by 3.

In this way, when the reference destination is transitioned from the information storage area corresponding to the low accuracy time to the information storage area corresponding to the high accuracy time in the table, the shift amount of the reference destination address is the number of stages of the set value Ve (the set value Ve to be used). It should be changed according to the number). Therefore, in this example, the setting stage information is acquired in step S1608, and the process of shifting to the designated address is performed in the subsequent step S1609 based on the setting stage information. Specifically, in this example, the setting stage information representing "three stages" is acquired, and the reference destination address is shifted to the address six addresses ahead based on the setting stage information.

When the processes of steps S1608 and S1609 are executed, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH1 at the time of low accuracy is performed in step S1610, and it is determined that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH1. In the process of step S1601, the setting difference information “001H” of the address “4103” shown in FIG. 27A is acquired.
Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the setting difference information is other than "000H" in the determination process of step S1602, and the processes after step S1605 are executed again.
Then, in the acquisition process of step S1607 in this case, the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired from the determination reference values TH2 of "BIGHMAX1", "BIGHMAX2", and "BIGHMAX6", and the determination reference value TH2 corresponding to the set value Ve is acquired, and the determination reference value TH2 is acquired via steps S1608 and S1609. In the determination process of step S1610 to be performed, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the acquired determination reference value TH2. That is, the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed.

In this way, when the jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 (it is a jackpot), the subsequent steps S1611 are performed. By the processing, the acquisition processing of the hit information is performed.
In the table shown in FIG. 27A, the storage area (“4104” to “4106”) of the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used as a variable representing the hit information corresponding to the case where the judgment reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is used. Variables represented by "000H, 05AH, 000H" are stored in the next address (the variables also represent "low accuracy medium jackpot information", "high accuracy medium jackpot information", and "small hit information" in order from the left side). ..
In the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, the CPU 201 stores the random number in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above. The rightmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 is among the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the hit information stored in the next address of the storage area of the determination reference value TH2 as described above in the process of step S1613. The leftmost "000H" is acquired, and if the probability is changing, the central "05AH" of the variables "000H, 05AH, 000H" of the corresponding information is acquired in the process of step S1614. That is, the information of "missing" is acquired if the probability is not changing, and "hit" is acquired if the probability is changing.

In step S1610, a jackpot determination using the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy was performed, and the random number value was determined to be larger than the determination reference value TH2 (that is, it is out of alignment with both the determination reference values TH1 and TH2). In this case, in this example, processing is performed based on the information stored in the areas of the addresses “4109” to “4111” in the table shown in FIG. 27A, that is, the out-of-order correspondence information for acquiring the out-of-order information.
Here, depending on the processing of steps S1608 and S1609 executed when the determination reference value TH2 at the time of high accuracy is acquired in step S1607, the reference destination address is 6 addresses ahead of the previous address "4103". It will be shifted to "4109". Therefore, in the process of step S1601 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is larger than the determination reference value TH2 in step S1610, "000H" stored in the address "4109" is acquired as the setting difference information. Will be done. That is, in this case, the process proceeds in the order of steps S1601 → S1602 → S1603.

Here, in the table shown in FIG. 27A, in the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the information corresponding to the loss, “65535” is set as the determination reference value at the next address (“4110”) of the setting difference information. It is stored. That is, the "disengagement determination reference value" for surely obtaining the deviation determination with respect to the random number value which can be 0 to 65535 is stored. Further, variables "000H, 000H, 000H" representing the loss information are stored in the address ("4111") next to the deviation determination reference value. The variables are also provided as information corresponding to low accuracy middle, high accuracy middle, and small hit in order from the left side.

In this case, in the acquisition process of step S1603, "65535" as the "disappearance determination reference value" stored in the address next to the reference destination address is acquired as the determination reference value. Then, in the determination process of step S1610 executed through the process of step S1604, it is determined whether or not the random number value is larger than the "disappearance determination reference value" = 65535, and the determination result is that the random number value is A judgment result is obtained that is not larger than the "judgment reference value for loss".

In this way, when the determination using the "disappearance judgment reference value" is performed in step S1610 and it is determined that the random number value is not larger than the "disengagement determination reference value", the disengagement information is obtained by the processing after step S1611. Is acquired.
Specifically, in the process of step S1611 executed in response to the determination that the random number value is not larger than the "disappearance determination reference value" in step S1610, the CPU 201 is the "disappearance determination reference value" in the table. Of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored in the next address of, the rightmost "000H" is acquired.
Further, in this case, if the probability change is not in progress, the CPU 201 sets the leftmost "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" stored at the next address of the "disengagement determination reference value" in the process of step S1613. If it is acquired and the probability change is in progress, the central "000H" of the variables "000H, 000H, 000H" is acquired in the process of step S1614.
In this way, when it is determined that both of the judgment reference values TH1 and TH2 are out of alignment, each "hit information" (small hit information, low probability medium big hit information, high probability) is used as information indicating the winning. Information indicating "missing" is acquired as medium / big hit information).

(Variable pattern lottery process)

The variable pattern lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern lottery process of step S1504.
First, in step S1701, the CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a setting error based on the setting error flag, and if it is not a setting error, determines whether or not it is a hit in step S1702. That is, based on the jackpot determination flag, it is determined whether or not the jackpot (= 5AH) is achieved.

If it is determined in step S1702 that it is not a hit (it is a loss), the CPU 201 selects the deviation variation pattern table in step S1703, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection process in step S1706. That is, it is a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern based on a table and a random number for the fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects the hit variation pattern table in step S1704, and then proceeds to the variation pattern selection process in step S1706.

FIG. 29 shows an example of the out-of-order variation pattern table, and FIG. 30 shows an example of the hit variation pattern table.
First, as a premise, as the out-of-order fluctuation pattern table and the hit fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 and a fluctuation pattern table for special figure 2 are prepared, respectively.

In the deviation pattern lottery performed using the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 29, the variation patterns (variation patterns that can be selected by the lottery) of the lottery candidates are "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", and "normal variation". There are 9 types of "8s", "normal fluctuation 12s", "normal reach", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4".
Further, in the hit variation pattern lottery performed using the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30, the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are "normal variation per", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", and "super reach 3". It is said to be 5 types of "Super Reach 4".
Regarding "normal fluctuation", the numerical value described together represents the fluctuation time, and "s" after the numerical value means "second".

Here, among the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns, in particular, "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s" belong to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the so-called "missing" that is not selected at the time of hitting (hereinafter,). Sometimes referred to as "off-the-shelf fluctuation pattern").

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery at the time of loss is performed using a variation pattern table that is different for each loss type (disappearance 1, 2, 3) regardless of whether the special figures 1 and 2 are used (see FIG. 29).
Here, in the present embodiment, the selection rate (the rate at which the corresponding type is selected) by the symbol lottery is different for each of the "missing 1", "missing 2", and "missing 3" types, and "missing 1". "Has the highest selection rate, and" Out of line 2 "and" Out of line 3 "have a lower selection rate than" Out of line 1 ". Specifically, in this example, the selection rate of "outside 1" is "190/200", and the selection rate of "outside 2" and "outside 3" is "5/200", respectively. In this case, if the jackpot determination result is "missing", in most cases, "missing 1" is selected as the losing type.

As the variable pattern lottery for the special figure 1, the variable pattern lottery when the outlier type is "outlier 1" is not a lottery according to the set value Ve, but a lottery according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, among the fluctuation pattern tables for the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern table used when the loss type is "outside 1" is common among the set values Ve, but is different for each number of reserved balls. Is prepared.

In the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 in the case of "outlier 1", the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are set to 5 types of "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", "normal variation 12s", and "normal reach". Therefore, in this example, the fluctuation pattern to be drawn is different depending on the number of reserved balls.
Specifically, when the number of reserved balls = 0, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "normal reach", when the number of reserved balls = 1, "normal fluctuation 8s" and "normal reach", and when the number of reserved balls = 2, "normal" When the number of reserved balls = 3, "normal fluctuation 4s" and "normal reach" are set as fluctuation patterns for the lottery, respectively.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern table, the numerical values stored for each fluctuation pattern of the lottery target are distributed with the winning probability on the premise that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern can take 200 numerical values of 0 to 199. It represents a value (a value that represents distribution). For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1, in the table of "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", the stored value for "normal fluctuation 12s" = "160", and the stored value for "normal reach" = "40". However, this means that the winning probability of "normal fluctuation 12s" is "160/200" and the winning probability of "normal reach" is "40/200".
The above distribution value is shown as the storage value of the table for the sake of convenience of explanation, and the judgment reference value as used in the above-mentioned jackpot random number judgment is stored in the actual fluctuation pattern table. become. For example, in the case of the above table of "outside 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", for example, "159" is stored as an actual stored value (judgment reference value), and in that case, the random number for the fluctuation pattern is 159 or less. If, "normal variation 12s" is selected, and if the random number for the variation pattern is larger than 159, "normal reach" is selected.

As can be seen by referring to the distribution value shown in FIG. 29, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “outlier 1”, “normal variation” is more likely to be selected than “normal reach”. (I try to increase the appearance rate).
Further, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "outside 1", the normal fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

Subsequently, as the fluctuation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern lottery in each case where the loss type is "missing 2" and "missing 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve, while depending on the number of reserved balls. It is not a lottery. For this reason, the variation pattern table for special figure 1 used in each of the cases of "off 2" and "out 3" is common among the number of reserved balls, but a different table is prepared for each set value Ve. There is.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery candidates are 4 of "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". It is said to be a seed.
In this example, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of “out of place 3”, the variation pattern to be drawn differs depending on the set value Ve.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of Special Figure 1, the variation patterns to be drawn for each combination of "outside 2" and "outside 3" and settings 1, 2 and 6 are as follows.
Setting 1 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 1 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 1
Setting 2 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 2 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 2, 3
Setting 6 and "Out of 2" = Super Reach 1, 2, 3, 4
Setting 6 and "Out of 3" = Super Reach 4

From the distribution values illustrated in the figure, in this example, as the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "out of line 2", in the case of setting 1, the variation is in the order of super reach 4, 3, 2, 1. The pattern is easy to select, and the variation pattern is selected in the order of super reach 1, 2, 3, 4 in the case of setting 2, and in the order of super reach 1, 3, 2, 4 in the case of setting 3. It's easy.
Further, in this example, regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special figure 1 corresponding to the case of "out of place 3", the higher the setting (the larger the set value Ve), the higher the expectation of winning the super reach tends to be selected. I am trying to do it.

It should be noted that, as in the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the case of "missing 2" above, the variation pattern table used for the lottery in which the variation patterns of the lottery candidates are three or more types has a plurality of values (as judgment reference values). The value represented by "the number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates-1") is stored. For example, in the table corresponding to the case of setting 1 and "missing 2" in the figure, for example, the first value = 9, the second value = 39, and the third value = 99 are the judgment reference values, respectively. In that case, if the random number for the fluctuation pattern is less than or equal to the first value, "super reach 1" is set, and if it is larger than the first value and less than or equal to the second value, "super reach 2" is set. If it is larger than the value and equal to or less than the third value, "Super Reach 3" is selected, and if it is larger than the third value, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Next, as the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery when the loss type is "out of line 1" is different from the case of the special figure 1, and the variation pattern of the lottery candidate is only "normal variation 12s". There is. Therefore, in the variation pattern table for the special figure 2, "out of ball 1" and "number of reserved balls = 0", "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls = 1", "out of line 1" and "number of reserved balls =" In each table used in the case of "2", "missing 1" and "number of reserved balls = 3", all the distribution values corresponding to "normal fluctuation 12s" are set to "200".
In this case, since the lottery results are the same even if the number of reserved balls is different, the variable pattern table can be a common table among the reserved balls.

Further, as the variable pattern lottery of the special figure 2, the variable pattern lottery when the outlier type is "outlier 2" and "outlier 3" is a lottery according to the set value Ve as in the case of the special figure 1. The lottery will not be based on the number of reserved balls. Therefore, regarding the fluctuation pattern table for the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern table used in each of the cases of "outside 2" and "outside 3" is common among the number of reserved balls, but differs depending on the set value Ve. A table is prepared.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery of Special Figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "missing 2" and "missing 3", there are two types of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates, "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4", depending on the set value Ve. , Any of these "normal fluctuation 12s" and "super reach 4" fluctuation patterns is selected.
Specifically, in the variation pattern lottery of the special figure 2 corresponding to the cases of "outlier 2" and "outlier 3" in this example, "normal variation 12s" is always selected when either setting 1 or 2 is set, respectively. Then, in the case of setting 6, "Super Reach 4" is selected.

Subsequently, the hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 will be described.
In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting, different tables are used for each hit type in both Special Figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is set as follows for each winning type. That is, when the hit type is "normal 4R", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets are "normal fluctuation hit", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" in both special figures 1 and 2. It is said that there are five types.
In addition, when the hit type is "normal 6R", in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation patterns of the lottery target are 5 of "normal fluctuation hit", "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4". In Special Figure 2, there are four types, "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4", excluding "normal fluctuation per".
Furthermore, when the hit type is "probability variation 6R" and "probability variation 10R", the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets are "super reach 1", "super reach 2", "super reach 3", and "super reach 4" in both special figures 1 and 2. There are four types.

In the variation pattern lottery at the time of hit in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for a specific hit type. Specifically, regarding the variation pattern lottery of special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R", and the variation pattern lottery of special figure 2 is "normal". A variable pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only for the hit types of "4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R".

Regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery in the case of "normal 4R", the fluctuation pattern of the lottery target is different depending on the set value Ve in both the special figures 1 and 2. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern lottery corresponding to "normal 4R" in this example, 5 types of "normal fluctuation per" to "super reach 4" are selected for setting 1, and "super" is selected for setting 2 or setting 6. The four types of "reach 1" to "super reach 4" are used as fluctuation patterns for the lottery.
Regarding the fluctuation pattern lottery in the case of "normal R6", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" which are hit types other than "normal 4R", the variation pattern to be drawn is set to the set value Ve in both Special Figures 1 and 2. It is said to be immutable.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting the special figure 1, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed only in the case of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of the special figure 1, different tables are prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of these "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R".
As can be seen with reference to FIG. 30, in this example, in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 1, in each of the “normal 4R” and “probability variation 10R” tables, the distribution value for “super reach 4” is set as the set value Ve increases. It's getting bigger. As a result, at the time of hitting each of "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R", the higher the current setting, the easier it is to select the variation pattern having the highest expected winning value as the variation pattern of Special Figure 1.

Further, in this example, in the variation pattern lottery at the time of hitting in the special figure 2, the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve is performed for the "probability variation 6R" as well as the "normal 4R" and the "probability variation 10R". Therefore, in the hit variation pattern table of the special figure 2, a different table is prepared for each set value Ve as the variation pattern table used in the case of "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R". In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 2, in all of these "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" tables, the distribution value for "super reach 4" is increased as the set value Ve increases. ..

Here, as can be seen by referring to the distribution value in the figure, in this example, the distribution value for "Super Reach 4" is the largest in each table regardless of the hit type or the set value Ve. That is, in this example, in the fluctuation pattern lottery when it is determined to be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation of winning is most likely to be selected.

The description returns to FIG.
In the selection process of step S1706 described above, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the deviation or hit fluctuation pattern table as described above.
Specifically, when the deviation variation pattern table is selected corresponding to the case where it is determined that the deviation occurs in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table according to the deviation type, the number of reserved balls, and the set value Ve from the variation pattern table. Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the selected table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the hit variation pattern table is selected corresponding to the case where it is determined to be a hit in step S1702, the CPU 201 selects a table according to the hit type and the set value Ve from the corresponding variation pattern table, and selects the table. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern. At this time, it goes without saying that the tables for special figure 1 and special figure 2 are selected and separated according to which of special figures 1 and 2 is the symbol to be processed.
As can be understood from the above explanation, in each of the hit / miss fluctuation pattern tables, one or more judgment reference values corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the lottery targets (number of fluctuation patterns of lottery candidates-1) are defined. In the selection process of step S1706, the variation pattern is selected based on the result of comparing the magnitude relationship between the determination reference value stored in the table selected as described above and the value of the random number for the variation pattern.

In the above description, the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern has been divided into tables for each set value Ve, but a common table may be used among some set value Ves.
FIG. 31 shows an example thereof.
Here, a modified example of the hit variation pattern table is shown on the premise that the set value Ve can take 6 values corresponding to the settings 1 to 6.
In the example of FIG. 31, a table corresponding to "normal 4R" and "probability variation 10R" for special figure 1 and a table corresponding to "normal 4R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R" for special figure 2 are set respectively. An example in which the table is divided into groups 1 to 3 and sets 4 to 6 is shown.
As in the example of FIG. 31, in performing the variation pattern lottery according to the set value Ve, the table is not limited to being individually divided for each set value Ve, and is common among some set value Ve. Table may be used.

Next, processing when a setting error is detected during the variable pattern lottery will be described.
If it is determined in step S1701 of FIG. 28 that a setting error has occurred, the CPU 201 proceeds to step S1705, selects a common variation pattern table at the time of a setting error, and executes the selection process of step S1706.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of a common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error.
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern lottery at the time of setting error performed using the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, the deviation fluctuation pattern is forcibly selected regardless of whether the special figures 1 and 2 are hit / miss. To do so. That is, in this example, any of the outlier variation patterns of "normal variation 4s", "normal variation 6s", "normal variation 8s", and "normal variation 12s" is forcibly selected.

In the fluctuation pattern lottery at the time of setting error in this example, a different fluctuation pattern is selected according to the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 side, and a specific fluctuation pattern is selected for the special figure 2 side regardless of the number of reserved balls. Only, specifically, only "normal variation 12s" is selected.
On the special figure 1 side, a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

Also in FIG. 32, for convenience of explanation, as the table structure, a structure in which the distribution values corresponding to the case where the random number for the variable pattern lottery can take a value of 0 to 199 is stored is shown, but the actual table structure is a reserved ball. As a table for each number (0 to 3), a structure in which at least a judgment reference value is associated with a fluctuation pattern of lottery candidates is adopted.
As for the special figure 2, if the specific fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls as in this example, there is no need to divide the table for each number of reserved balls (0 to 3). Needless to say.

In FIG. 28, in the selection process of step S1706, when the common variation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected in step S1705, the variation pattern is selected based on the table and the random number for the variation pattern. Specifically, in this example, a table corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error is selected, and the magnitude relationship between the judgment reference value stored in the selected table and the random number for the fluctuation pattern is determined. Select a variation pattern based on the result of the comparison.

The CPU 201 finishes the variation pattern lottery process of step S1508 in response to the execution of the selection process of step S1706. With the end of the lottery process of step S1504, the variation management process of step S1409 shown in FIG. 24 is completed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410 (flag ON process during variation) shown in FIG. 23.
As described above, in the command transmission process of step S1411 following step S1410, a "variation pattern designation command" indicating the lottery result of the variation pattern and a "decorative symbol designation command" representing the symbol lottery result are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. To.
On the effect control unit 24 side, based on these commands, a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type having a reach symbol as a component) and a decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol). The combination of the above is determined, and a lottery for the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type is performed in the symbol variation display game.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, if a setting error is recognized at the start of fluctuation of the special figure, the detached fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation) is forcibly selected. At this time, the decorative symbol is selected. If the intense heat fluctuation is selected as the side fluctuation, the player is confused. Therefore, in this example, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time such as a normal fluctuation of 4 s to a normal fluctuation of 12 s is selected as described above. There is.
Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 24 is also devised so that the advance notice effect is not performed when a setting error occurs. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a set value abnormality command (see step S1104 in FIG. 20) for notifying a setting error from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 is prevented from drawing a lottery for the advance notice effect. To.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a setting error is found based on the above setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 sends a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member" to the liquid crystal display device 36. Notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an image containing. The notification is not limited to notification by image display using the liquid crystal display device 36, for example, notification by lighting (and / or blinking) of a sound or LED, or a set of a plurality of types of production means such as an image, sound, or LED. It can also be a combined notification.

In the above, regarding the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error on the special figure 1, the normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. It is also possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time as the number decreases.
Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the same fluctuation pattern can be selected for each number of reserved balls as in the case of the special figure 2. In the example of FIG. 33, the case where "normal variation 12s" is commonly selected for each number of reserved balls is shown.
As described above, in the common fluctuation pattern table at the time of setting error, the relationship between the number of reserved balls and the selected fluctuation pattern can be considered in various ways and is not limited to a specific relationship.
As for the special figure 2 side, the fluctuation pattern selected depending on the number of reserved balls may be different as in the special figure 1 side.

(Advantages of data table related to set values as an embodiment)

Here, in this example, in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27A, the area below the storage area (“4109” to “4111”) of the information corresponding to the loss is set as an empty area. Further, in this example, also in the random number determination table for jackpot determination shown in FIG. 27B, the area on the lower layer side of the storage area (“4148” to “4150”) of the information corresponding to the loss is set as an empty area. In this example, "0" is stored in these free areas.
In these random number determination tables for jackpot determination, the area other than the free area can be rephrased as the usage data storage area in which the usage data used for the progress control of the game operation is stored. Further, the free area can be rephrased as an unused data storage area in which unused data not used for controlling the progress of the game operation is stored.

Then, when such a random number determination table for jackpot determination is a first data table including a plurality of set value related information selected with reference to the set value Vd, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 In the ROM 202, the first data table and the second data table stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table and not including the set value related information are stored.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a storage example of the first data table and the second data table in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment.
As shown in the figure, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, the special symbol creation address table, that is, the second data that does not include the set value related information is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table (random number determination table for jackpot determination). The table is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table including a plurality of set value related information and the set value related information stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table are stored. A second data table that is not included is stored, and the first data table contains a usage data storage area in which usage data used for progress control of the game operation is stored and unused data not used for progress control of the game operation. It consists of a stored unused data storage area.

When only the used data storage area is secured in the first data table containing the set value related information, when trying to increase the number of set values Vd (number of stages) to be used, the set value for the increase When the setting value related information related to Vd is added to the first data table, it is necessary to shift the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table is forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When trying to increase the number of set value Vd to be used by securing the storage area of not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing the set value related information as described above, It is possible to store the set value-related information related to the increased set value Vd in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the usage data storage area described above stores usage data having a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd (“3” in this example) that can be set in the setting change process, and is not used data. In the storage area, unused data having a capacity corresponding to the number of set values Vd that cannot be set by the setting change process (in this example, "3" corresponding to the set values Ve "3", "4", and "5") is stored. Has been done. Specifically, in this example, the number of set values Ve that can be set according to the rules = 6 minus the number of set values Ve that are actually used = 3, and the capacity corresponding to the set value Ve of "3" is not used. The data is to be stored.
As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure the storage capacity of the set value-related information related to the increased set value Ve when the number of the set value Ve used is increased. ..
Therefore, it is possible to prevent rewriting of the data after the second data table.

Further, in the present embodiment, "0" is stored as unused data as described above, so that even if the first data table is referred to by the unused setting value Vd, the unused setting is made. It is possible to prevent the set value related information corresponding to the value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20, the first data table is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the second data table, and the second data table is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table. The data table is not stored.
Specifically, in the ROM 202 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the set value offset conversion table (see FIG. 16) as the first data table is stored in the lowest layer area of the normal data area. ..
Here, as shown in FIG. 36, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 20 has "normal program area", "unused area", "normal data area", "unused area", "measurement program area", and "in order from the upper layer side". An unused area, a measurement data area, and an unused area are defined. The "normal program area" is an area in which a program related to general games is stored, and the "normal data area" is an area in which a data table related to general games referred to based on the program of the "normal program area" is stored. is there. For example, the big hit determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 27 is stored in this “normal data area”.
The "measurement program area" is an area in which a program related to display and measurement of performance information such as the above-mentioned normal time ratio information is stored, and the "measurement data area" is referred to based on the program of the "measurement program area". This is the area where the data table related to the display and measurement of performance information is stored.

As shown in FIG. 35, by storing the set value offset conversion table as the first data table in the lowermost layer area of the normal data area, the first data table can be, for example, the above-mentioned "special symbol creation address table" ( (See FIG. 34) and the like, the second data table is stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the second data table, and the second data table is not stored in the storage area on the lower layer side of the first data table.

When the number of set values Vd to be used is increased by storing the first and second data tables in the ROM 202 in the above manner, the contents of the first data table located at the bottom layer of the data area in the ROM 202. It is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the data part on the lower layer side of the first data table.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values Vd to be used.

<5. Production control unit processing>
[5-1. Outline of processing]

Next, the processing of the effect control unit 24 will be described. First, a structural example of scenario data for effect control will be described.
The structure of the scenario registration information will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A shows the structure of scenario registration information as a main scenario and a sub-scenario. This scenario registration information is set using the work area provided in the RAM 243 (for example, the work memory for the built-in CPU) of the effect control unit 24.
In the present embodiment, the scenario registration information has 64 channels of scenario channels sCH0 to sCH63. The scenarios registered in each scenario channel SCH can be executed at the same time.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each scenario channel SCH includes the sub-scenario timer (scTm) used in the sub-scenario update process, the previous time (scPrevTm), and the sub-scenario execution line indicating the execution line of the sound / motor sub-scenario table. (ScIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) indicating the execution line of the ramp sub-scenario table, main scenario timer (msTm) used for scenario update processing, main scenario execution line (mcIx) indicating the execution line of the main scenario table, There are a main scenario number (mcNo), a main scenario option (mcOpt), a user option (userFn), a waiting time (delay), and a checksum (checkSum), which are optional data that can be added to the main scenario.

When starting the production by the sound output by the speaker 46, the light emission by the light display device 45a, and the driving of the movable body accessory by the movable body accessory motor 80c, the standby time (delay) and the main scenario number (mcNo) are set to the scenario channel sCH0. Register to a free scenario channel in ~ sCH63.
The delay time indicates the time from registration to the scenario channel SCH until the scenario is started. The waiting time (delay) is subtracted by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later). When the waiting time (delay) is 0, the process corresponding to the registered data is executed.

FIG. 39 shows an example of scenario numbers 1, 2, and 3 as a part of the main scenario table. As the scenario of each scenario number, the value of the main scenario timer (msTm) can be described as time data in each line (row) of the scenario, and the sub-scenario number (scNo) and option (OPT) can be described. .. That is, in the main scenario table, the sub-scenario (and option in some cases) to be executed is specified as the time by the main scenario timer (msTm). The scenario data end code D_SEEND or the scenario data loop code D_SELOP is described in the last line of the scenario.
The value of the main scenario timer (msTm) is incremented by 1 at a predetermined processing timing (for example, step S2004 in FIG. 41 described later) from the start of the main scenario.
The scenario table of each scenario number advances to the next row after the time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row elapses. The time data for each row indicates when that row ends.
For example, in the case of scenario number 2, the operation of sub-scenario number 2 is specified as the time of the timer value "1500", the operation of sub-scenario number 20 is specified as the time of the next timer value "500", and the next timer value " The operation of sub-scenario number 21 is specified as the time of "2000". The next line is the scenario data exit code D_SEEND. In the case of the scenario data end code D_SEEND, this scenario is deleted from the scenario registration information (work).

Next, the structure of the lamp data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37B. As the lamp data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the lamp sub-scenario table, that is, an effect operation (lighting pattern) by the light display device 45a is registered. This lamp data registration information is also set using the work area (work area) of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the lamp data registration information has 16 channels of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Priority is set for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15, and the priority increases in order from the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. Therefore, the scenario (ramp sub-scenario) registered in the ramp channel dwCH15 is executed with the highest priority. Further, for example, if a scenario is registered in the lamp channels dwCH3 and dwCH10, the scenario registered in the lamp channel dwCH10 is preferentially executed.
The lamp channel dwCH0 is mainly used for a lamp effect associated with BGM (Back Ground Music), the lamp channel dwCH15 is used for an error-related lamp effect, and the lamp channels dwCH1 to dwCH14 are used for a normal effect.

As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each lamp channel dwCH includes a registered lighting number (lmpNew) indicating the registered lighting pattern number, an execution lighting number (lmpNo) indicating the execution lighting pattern number, and a lamp sub-scenario. There is an offset (offset), an execution time (time), and a checksum (checkSum) that indicate the execution line.

FIG. 40A shows an example of lamp sub-scenario numbers 1, 2 and 3 as a part of the lamp sub-scenario table. As the lamp sub-scenario of each number, the value of the time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the lamp channel and the lamp number indicating various lighting patterns are described. In addition, the ramp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described in the last line.

In this ramp sub-scenario table, the time data (time) of each line indicates the time when the line is started after the sub-scenario is started.
The above-mentioned main scenario timer (msTm) is compared with the time data of the table, and if they match, the lamp number of the line is registered in the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B. The registered lamp channel dwCH is the channel indicated by the line.
For example, assume that the scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 39 is registered and the sub-scenario number 2 is referred to in the above-mentioned certain scenario channel SCH. In the lamp sub-scenario number 2 shown in FIG. 40A, the lamp channel 5 (dwCH5) and the lamp number 5 are described with the time data (time) = 0 in the first line. In this case, when the main scenario timer (msTm) = 0, the information of the first line is first registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information of FIG. 37B as the registration lighting number (lmpNew) = 5. The value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) of the scenario registration information is updated to the value of the next line (second line). This is a registration for executing the lighting pattern operation of the lighting number 5 with a relatively low priority of the lamp channel dwCH5.
For the second line, the same processing is performed when the main scenario timer (msTm) reaches "500". That is, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) = 6 (that is, the indication of the lighting pattern of the lighting number 6) is registered in the lamp channel dwCH5 of the lamp data registration information.
If the time data (time) is the same value in two consecutive lines, the processing for each line will be started at the same time.
In the lamp drive data creation process described later, the lamp drive data is created based on the lamp data registration information updated in this way.

Next, the structure of the motor data registration information will be described with reference to FIG. 37C. As the motor data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the motor sub-scenario table is registered. This motor data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the motor data registration information is assumed to have eight channels of motor channels mCH0 to mCH7 corresponding to, for example, eight motors.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each motor channel mCH includes the execution operation number (no), the registration operation number (noNew), the operation count (lcnt), the excitation counter (tcnt), the execution step (step), and the operation line. (Offset), parent (migration source) / child (migration destination) attribute (attribute), parent number (retNo), return address (retAddr), loop start point (roopAddr), loop count (roopCnt), error counter (errCnt) ), Current input information (currentSw), switch information on the software (softSw), and count on the software (softCnt).

FIG. 40C shows an example of the motor sub-scenario number 1 as a part of the motor sub-scenario table. As the motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of the time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and the information of the motor and the solenoid / user option is described. In addition, the scenario data end code D_MSEND is described in the last line.

Regarding this motor sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the time data (time) value of this motor sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the line concerned)-(time data of the previous line).
The motor data (motors 0 to 3, 4 to 7) is configured to indicate the motor operation pattern number (motor operation table number described later) in 1 byte for each motor. The operation pattern number is set in the registered operation number (noNew) and the execution operation number (no) of the motor channel corresponding to the motor number.
In step S2202 of FIG. 44, which will be described later, the motor data registration information is updated, and in step S2203, motor drive data is created based on the update of the motor data registration information.

FIG. 38 shows the sound data registration information. As the sound data registration information, information indicating a scenario selected from the sound sub-scenario table is registered. This sound data registration information is also set using the work area of the RAM 243.
In the present embodiment, the sound data registration information has 16 channels of sound channels aCH0 to aCH15.
As shown in the figure, the information that can be registered in each sound channel aCH includes volume transition amount (frzVq), volume (frzVl), transition amount change (rsv2), volume change (rsv1), phrase change (rsv0), and stereo (frzSt). ), Loop (frzLp), phrase number hi (frzHi), phrase number low (frzLo).

FIG. 40B shows an example of sound sub-scenario numbers 1 and 2 as a part of the sound sub-scenario table. As the sound / motor sub-scenario of each number, the value of time data (time) is described in each line of the scenario, and information on BGM, warning sound, error sound, and sound control is described. In addition, the scenario data end code D_SEEND is described in the last line.
Regarding this sound sub-scenario table, when the sub-scenario timer (scTm) becomes 0 (it is 0 at the beginning), the time data (time) value of this sound sub-scenario table is set in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). To do. The time data (time) of each line indicates the timing at which the line ends. The absolute time is described in the sub-scenario timer (scTm). Therefore, the time data value to be set is the value of (time data of the line concerned)-(time data of the previous line).
The BGM data of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the BGM, and is set in the sound channel aCH0 (additionally aCH1 in the case of stereo) in the sound data registration information. ..
The warning sound data of the line is composed of information to be registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and the volume value of the warning sound, and is set in a vacant place of the sound channels aCH2 to aCH14.
The error sound data of the line is composed of information registered in the sound data registration information such as the phrase number and volume value of the error sound, and is set in the sound channel aCH15.
The sound control data has the lower 6 bytes as channel information and the upper 2 bytes as control information.
In step S2033 of FIG. 41, which will be described later, playback output control is performed based on the scenario update process and the updated sound data registration information.

The sound sub-scenario table and the motor sub-scenario table may have a table structure integrated for each time line.

An example of processing of the effect control unit 24 that performs effect control using the scenario data structure as described above, particularly processing of the CPU 241 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.
The CPU 241 starts the process shown in FIG. 41 when the power is turned on to the main body of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

First, in step S2000, the CPU 241 performs necessary initial setting processing before the start of the game operation. For example, as initial setting processing, interface system initialization, interrupt setting, external memory initialization, WDT initialization, starting point return processing and control initialization of movable body accessory, sound source control initialization, serial output controller initialization Interface, scheduler (scenario scheduler, device scheduler, lamp scheduler, sound scheduler) initialization, system timer initialization, liquid crystal control initialization, etc.
Each scheduler refers to the above-mentioned scenario registration information, motor data registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information, or the progress of scenario control based on these. As the initialization process, the work area for storing the scenario registration information and the like is initialized.

After completing the initial setting process in step S2000, the CPU 241 executes the power-on history information initial setting process in step S2001. The initial setting process is a process for holding in the RAM 243 information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, which will be described later, which is performed by using the liquid crystal display device 36. Although details will be described later, predetermined history information such as change history information of the set value Ve is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (see FIG. 46).
The process as an embodiment in which the CPU 241 executes the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs, including the process of initializing the history information at power-on in step S2001, will be described again.

The CPU 241 repeats the processes after step S2002 in response to the execution of the process of step S2001.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the CPU 241 executes the processes after step S2002 while monitoring the frame timing of the liquid crystal display device 36. In this example, control is performed based on a V blank signal, which is a synchronization signal used for display control.
In the present embodiment, the V blank signal is generated twice during 1/30 second (33.3 ms), which is one frame period of the display image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Since the CPU 241 counts up the V blank interrupt counter in response to the V blank signal, the V blank interrupt counter counts up every 1/60 second (16.6 ms).
As a matter of course, each processing of the CPU 241 is performed based on a processing clock having a frequency extremely higher than the frequency of the V blank signal. Each process of FIG. 41 is performed while grasping the period from the start to the end of the frame according to the V blank signal. At the start of the frame, the processes are performed once in steps S2004 to S2006, and then the V blank. Steps S2021 to S2043 are repeated until the end of the one-frame period is confirmed by the value of the interrupt counter. When the end of one frame period is detected, the processes of steps S205 to S2052 are performed.

In step S2002, the CPU 241 performs clear control on the WDT circuit included in the effect control unit 24.
In the following step S2003, the CPU 241 confirms the frame update flag. The frame update flag is a flag for managing scheduler update and the like in the frame period.
The frame update flag is turned off at the start of a certain frame of the display data (because it is turned off in step S2052 described later at the end of the frame).
Therefore, at the frame start timing, the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2003 to S2004.

In step S2004, the CPU 241 updates the frame of the scenario scheduler. Specifically, this is a process of updating the waiting time (delay), the main scenario timer (msTm), and the sub-scenario timer (scTm) of the scenario registration information of FIG. 37A. That is, it can be said that the timer of the production scenario is advanced by one timing at the start of the frame.
Then, the CPU 241 turns on the frame update flag in the following step S2005. This is information indicating that the timer of the scenario has progressed in the current frame.
Further, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2006. This is information indicating that the scheduler has not been updated, that is, the scenario contents (scenario registration information, lamp data registration information, sound data registration information) have not been updated as the timer progresses.
Then, the process returns to step S2002. After the CPU 241 clears the WDT circuit, the frame update flag is ON in step S2003, so that the process proceeds to step S2020. Here, the WDT circuit is sequentially reset if the CPU 241 is in a normal processing state.

As described above, steps S2004 to S2006 are performed only once after the frame start timing, and in step S2004, the timer of the scenario registration information is updated. The scenario for directing progresses every 33.3 ms, which is a frame period. For example, the main scenario timer (msTm) advances every 33.3 ms. The time of the main scenario timer (msTm) in one row in the main scenario table of FIG. 39 corresponds to the time of the indicated value × 33.3 ms. Further, the time of one line indicated by the time in the sub-scenario table of FIG. 40 also corresponds to the time of the indicated value × 33.3 ms.

In step S2020, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V blank interrupt counter has not reached “2” (that is, if it is “0” or “1”), the process proceeds to step S2021.
The V-blank interrupt counter is cleared at the end of the frame in step S2051 and is incremented twice in one frame. Therefore, the V blank interrupt counter = 0 indicates the first half period of the frame, and the V blank interrupt counter = 1 indicates the second half period of the frame. The V blank interrupt counter = 2 at the V blank signal at the end of the frame.
The CPU 241 proceeds from steps S2020 to S2021 so as to repeat steps S2021 to S2043 as many times as possible during the frame period in which the V-blank interrupt counter is “0” or “1”.

In step S2021, the CPU 241 branches the process depending on whether the V blank interrupt counter is "0" or "1". That is, whether the present is the first half or the second half of a certain frame period.
Currently, if the V blank interrupt counter = 0, that is, the first half of the frame, the process proceeds to step S2022 to confirm the reception command from the main control unit 20. That is, it is confirmed whether or not one or more received commands are stored in the command reception buffer. If there is no receive command, the process proceeds to step S2030.
If there is one or a plurality of received commands, the CPU 241 performs a command analysis process in step S2023.

Then, the CPU 241 turns off the scheduler update flag in step S2024. Note that turning off the scheduler update flag in step S2024 means that if a command is received during the current frame period, even after the scheduler update flag was once turned on in step S2031 before. It has the meaning of turning it off.

An example of the command analysis process in step S2023 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.
As described above, in step S2022 of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 confirms whether or not the effect control command supplied from the main control unit 20 is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is stored. Will be read by the process of FIG. 42.

The effect control unit 24 is provided with a command reception buffer in the RAM 243 for taking in the effect control commands transmitted from the main control unit 20.
First, in step S2101 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms the read pointer indicating the read address of the command reception buffer and the write pointer indicating the write address.
The light pointer is updated in response to command reception, and the received effect control command is stored at the address indicated by the light pointer accordingly. The read pointer is updated (step S2102) when reading from the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer = the write pointer, the effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, if the read pointer is not a write pointer, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the CPU 241 loads 1 byte of command data from the address indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. In this case, the read pointer is incremented for the next read (load).

Actually, the presence or absence of the receive command in step S2022 of FIG. 41 can also be determined by whether or not the read pointer = the write pointer. As an actual program, if the read pointer = the write pointer at the time when the command check process is first performed, it may be determined in step S2022 of FIG. 41 that there is no receive command.

As described above, one effect control command is composed of two bytes, one byte as a mode and one byte as an event. In step S2103 of FIG. 42, the CPU 241 confirms whether the loaded 1-byte command data is a mode or an event. This confirmation is performed by the value of Bit7 out of 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7).
Then, in the mode, the process proceeds to step S2104 as a process of receiving higher-level data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command HI byte". It also clears the "command LO byte" register. Then, the process returns to step S2101.
Even after that, if the read pointer = the write pointer, the effect control command that has not been read yet is stored in the command reception buffer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the CPU 241 is indicated by the read pointer in the command reception buffer. Load 1 byte of command data from the address. It also increments the read pointer.
If the read command is an event, the process proceeds from steps S2103 to S2105 as a process of receiving lower-level data of the command, and the read command data is saved in the register "command LO byte".

The mode and event command data are saved in the registers "command HI byte" and "command LO byte", so that the CPU 241 has fetched one command.
Therefore, in step S2106, the CPU 241 performs processing according to the captured command. A specific example will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

The read pointer = write pointer is when the effect control command that the CPU 241 has not yet captured does not exist in the command reception buffer. By confirming the read pointer = write pointer in step S2101, the command analysis process as step S2023 in FIG. 41 ends.

An example of the command correspondence process in step S2106 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
FIG. 43A shows a basic process as a command corresponding process. In response to the reception of the 2-byte effect control command, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2121 of FIG. 43A whether or not the test mode is currently in progress. In the test mode, in step S2122, all the production scenarios are cleared, the sound output is stopped, and the LED in the light display device 45a is turned off. Then, the test mode is terminated in step S2123.
If you are not in test mode, do not perform these processes.
Then, the CPU 241 processes the captured effect control command in step S2130.

The effect control commands include, for example, a special symbol variation pattern specification command, a decorative symbol specification command, a hold addition command, a game state specification command, a power-on command, a RAM clear command, a setting changing command, a setting change end command, and a setting confirmation command. Commands, setting confirmation end commands, setting value commands (in this example, the main control unit 20 sends at least at startup (S808 in FIG. 17) and at the start of symbol fluctuation (S1411 in FIG. 23)), error commands (of various errors) Notification command) ... etc. are set in various ways. In step S2130, the CPU 241 performs a process specified by the program in response to the received command. Here, specific processing is illustrated by listing four effect control commands in FIGS. 43B to 43E.

FIG. 43B shows the process S2130a when the variation pattern designation command is incorporated as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 performs a process of setting the decoration symbol designation command waiting state in step S2131. This is because the CPU 241 controls the variation display of the symbol by sequentially receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command.

FIG. 43C shows the process S2130b when the symbol designation command is taken in as the command process in the step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 first confirms in step S2132 whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process ends as it is.
When the decorative symbol designation command is received, if the variation pattern designation command has already been received, the process proceeds to step S2133, and first, the scenario registration for the operation of the accessory origin correction is performed. Then, in step S2134, the symbol variation flag is set. The symbol fluctuation flag is provided corresponding to each of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and each flag represents the fluctuation state. For example, a 2-bit first special symbol fluctuation flag FZ1, a second special symbol fluctuation flag FZ2, and a normal symbol fluctuation flag FZ3 are prepared, and fluctuation, stop (hit), and stop (miss) are indicated for each. Here, with the start of fluctuation, the corresponding symbol fluctuation flag (one of FZ1, FZ2, FZ3) is set to a value indicating "changing".
In the case of a hit, the symbol fluctuation flag is set to a value indicating "stopped (hit)" for a predetermined time at the end of the symbol fluctuation, and then a value indicating "stopped (missing)" until the symbol fluctuation is started. Is set to.
In step S2135, the CPU 241 performs a fluctuation start process. After that, the fluctuation pattern designation command is deleted in step S2136 according to the start of fluctuation.

FIG. 43D shows the process S2130c when the power-on command is taken in as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2137. For example, the storage area such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2138, an error release command is transmitted, in step S2139, the accessory error information is cleared, in step S2140, the accessory operation is stopped, in step S2141, the power-on scenario is registered, and in step 2142, the power is turned on to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40. Set commands in sequence.

FIG. 43E shows the process S2130d when the RAM clear command is taken in as the command process in step S2130.
In this case, the CPU 241 clears the RAM 243 in step S2143. For example, the storage area such as the contents of the command reception / transmission buffer and various operation input information buffers is cleared.
Then, in step S2144, an error release command is transmitted, and in step S2145, a RAM clear error set and an error notification timer are set. Further, in step S2146, the information related to the lottery process in the RAM 243 is cleared, and in step S2147, the information related to the scenario is cleared. Then, in step S2148, the power initial on display (RAM clear) command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is set.

The example of the process corresponding to the command reception has been described above.
In this example, the process of steps 2022 to S2020 in FIG. 41 as the process corresponding to the above command reception is started only during the period of V blank interrupt counter = 0.

Subsequently, the CPU 241 confirms the scheduler update flag in step S2030 of FIG. 41 and branches the process. Here, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed only when the scheduler update flag is off.
Then, in step S2031, the frame update flag is turned on.
Since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2006 immediately after the start of the frame, the processing of steps S2031 to S2034 is performed when the processing of step S2030 is first performed in the current frame period. Further, since the scheduler update flag is turned off in step S2024, the processes of steps S2031 to S2034 are performed even when a command is received.

The CPU 241 performs a process as a scenario scheduler execution in step S2032. This is the process of updating the scenario registration information. For example, among the information registered in the scenario channel SCH, the processing corresponding to the registered data is executed for the information whose waiting time (delay) is 0. That is, processing is performed according to the scenario number specified in the main scenario table. The main scenario execution line (mcIx), sub-scenario execution line (scIx), sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx), etc. are also updated.
In step S2033, the CPU 241 executes the sound scheduler and processes the output. This is the update processing of the sound data registration information according to the sound sub-scenario specified in the scenario table, and the output processing of the sound control signal based on the sound data registration information. The CPU 241 causes the sound controller of the effect control unit 24 to execute sound output according to the progress of the current scenario.

In step S2034, the CPU 241 performs a lamp scheduler execution process.
This is the process of updating the lamp data registration information according to the lamp sub-scenario specified in the scenario table.
For example, the CPU 241 performs the following processing for each of the lamp channels dwCH0 to dwCH15. First, the main scenario timer (msTm) and the time data (time) of the lamp sub-scenario table are compared. The time data (time) of the ramp sub-scenario table indicates the time when the line (the line indicated by the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx)) is started. Therefore, if the time of the main scenario timer is equal to or longer than the time data (time), the process for that line is performed.
For example, first, it is determined whether or not the current line is the line in which the ramp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described. If the line is not the line in which the lamp scenario data end code D_LSEND is described, the CPU 241 acquires the lamp channel dwCH and the lamp number described in the line, and registers the lighting pattern number in the acquired lamp channel dwCH.
Further, the registered lighting number (lmpNew) and the execution lighting number (lmpNo) are set in the area corresponding to the lamp channel dwCH. That is, the lamp number acquired from the line in the lamp sub-scenario table is set to the registered lighting number (lmpNew), and "0" is set to the execution lighting number (lmpNo). Also, the value of the sub-scenario execution line lmp (lmpIx) is incremented by 1. As described above, the lamp data registration information is updated to the state in which the lamp effect operation to be executed is registered.

In step S2034, the lamp data registration information is updated as described above, and the lamp drive data creation and the lamp drive data output based on the updated lamp data registration information are performed in the later steps S2041 and S2042.

In step S2040, the CPU 241 branches the process according to the value of the V blank interrupt counter. If the V-blank interrupt counter is "0", the processes of steps S2041 to S2043 are executed, and if it is "1", these processes are not executed.
In step S2041, the CPU 241 creates lamp drive data. That is, the lamp drive data to be output to the driver that actually drives the various LEDs is generated based on the information registered in each lamp channel dwCH of the lamp data registration information.
Then, in step S2042, the generated lamp drive data is controlled to be output to the above driver.
In step S2043, the CPU 241 performs key event processing. Then, the process returns to step S2002.
The process of creating and outputting the lamp drive data in steps S2041 and S2042 is started only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0. That is, these processes are started only during the first half of the frame.

After the V blank interrupt counter = 2, that is, when the end of the frame period is detected (S2020: = 2), the CPU 241 performs the corresponding process at the end of the frame after step S2050.

First, the CPU 241 executes the history display process in step S2050. This history display process is a process for displaying the above-mentioned setting history confirmation screen Gs on the liquid crystal display device 36. The details will be described later.

In response to the execution of the display process in step S2050, the CPU 241 clears the V blank interrupt counter in step S2051, then turns off the frame update flag in step S2052, and returns to step S2002. Then, as explained, the processing for the new frame period is performed.

In addition to the above processing of FIG. 41, the CPU 241 executes the processing of FIG. 44 as, for example, an interrupt processing every 1 ms. That is, the process of FIG. 44 is a process executed every 1 ms regardless of the frame timing of the display data.
In FIG. 44, the CPU 241 performs the WDT pulse generation process in step S2200. The WDT circuit counts every 1 ms by this WDT pulse.
In step S2201, the CPU 241 performs a sensor update process for the motor. This is a process of detecting the information of the position detection sensor 82a described above.

In step S2202, the CPU 241 performs the device scheduler execution process. Specifically, the motor data registration information is updated. Further, in step S2203, as device scheduler output processing, motor drive data output processing is performed to the driver of the movable accessory motor 80c.
That is, the CPU 241 controls the motor operation every 1 ms, which is a time interval of about 1/30 of the frame period.

In the following step S2204, the CPU 241 performs a key input process. That is, the signal corresponding to the operation of various controls such as the effect button 13 is confirmed.
The CPU 241 ends the interrupt process shown in FIG. 44 in response to the execution of the process in step S2204.

Although the processing example of the CPU 241 has been described so far, in the above processing example, the CPU 241 performs various processing according to the frame of the display data.
FIG. 45 shows various timings for each frame period of the display data.
Let each frame of the display data be frames FR0, FR1, FR2, and so on. For example, the frame FR0 is displayed at the time points T0 to T1, and the frame FR1 is displayed at the time points T1 to T2.
Since the value of the V blank interrupt counter is cleared in step S2051 of FIG. 41, it becomes "0" at the start of the frame and "1" at the middle of the frame (time points T0m, T1m, etc.) as shown in the figure. It is cleared immediately after it becomes 2 ”.

In the figure, "SL" represents a frame period, and "SLs" represents a frame period start timing (hereinafter referred to as "frame start timing SLs"). "CA" means the first half of the frame.

First, as a premise, the liquid crystal control unit 40 performs the drawing process of the display data (frame image data) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the liquid crystal control command from the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241). This drawing process is executed for the display data of the next frame within the frame period SL. For example, the drawing of the display data of the frame FR1 is executed within the time points T0 to T1 which is the display period of the frame FR0.
Further, the liquid crystal control unit 40 preloads the data used for drawing. This preload is executed one frame before the drawing process in preparation for drawing. For example, the preload for drawing the display data of the frame FR2 is executed within the time points T0 to T1 which is the display period of the frame FR0.
The start timings of these drawing processes and preloads are synchronized with the frame start timing SLs as shown in the figure.

On the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) side, the processes of the steps S2021 to S2043 are repeatedly performed during the frame period indicated by SL.
However, the reception command processing (S2022 to S2024) is executed only for CA during the first half of the frame. This is because these are executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.
The analysis process of the received command is as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, but this is a process with a relatively heavy processing load, and the number of processes increases depending on the number of received commands. Depending on the type of command, it may be necessary to perform a lottery for the production. In the present embodiment, such processing is performed only in the first half of the frame.
Therefore, regarding the command signal, for example, for the command signal received in the period indicated by the broken line as the time points T0m to T1m, the command analysis is performed in the period of the time points T1 to T1m.

In addition, lamp data creation / output processing (S2241 to S2243) is also executed only for CA during the first half of the frame. This is because these are also executed only when the V blank interrupt counter = 0.

[5-2. Display of setting history confirmation screen]

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of displaying a history related to an operation related to a set value Ve (Vd) as a set operation history. Specifically, as the setting operation history, a history related to the change of the set value Ve and a history related to the confirmation of the set value Ve (setting confirmation process) are displayed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as one display mode of the setting operation history.
The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 based on the control of the effect control unit 24. In this example, the target events of the setting change and the setting confirmation are described as shown in the figure. Information indicating the content and the time of occurrence (in this example, date and time: date and time by hour and minute) is included.
The "content" of the target event corresponds to the name information of the type of the target event (that is, "setting change") and the changed setting value Ve (setting value Vd set by the setting change process) for the setting change. The numerical information of the set value Ve) is included. The setting confirmation includes name information of the type of the target event (that is, "setting confirmation") and numerical information of the setting value Ve (that is, the setting value Ve confirmed by the user) at the time of setting confirmation.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example is composed of a plurality of pages, and specifically, 5 pages can be displayed. The history information that can be displayed on one page is 10 in this example, and therefore a maximum of 50 (10 × 5) history information can be displayed.
In this example, the page switching operation on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the cross key 16 (see FIG. 3). For example, each time the direction indicating key of any of the cross keys 16 is pressed once, the page feed for one page is performed.

On the setting history confirmation screen Gs, a display number is assigned to each history information. In the case of this example, this display number is assigned "1" to the latest history, and the numbers are assigned in ascending order from the latest to the past.
In addition, the current page number is also displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (the maximum number of pages is also indicated as "1/5" in the figure).

Although not shown in FIG. 46, the target event of the history display in this example includes various errors other than the above-mentioned setting change and setting confirmation. Examples of the error here include various errors other than the set value error, such as a door opening error, a supply shortage error, and a ball clogging error.

The setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed in response to a predetermined operation being performed under a predetermined state. Specifically, the setting history confirmation screen Gs in this example is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 13 during the setting confirmation (during the execution of the setting confirmation process in step S109). Here, as understood from the above description, the setting confirmation process is executed in response to the opening of the front frame 2 and the operation of the setting key when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and therefore the setting history. It is assumed that the confirmation screen Gs is displayed in such a state where the front frame 2 is open at the time of activation.

FIG. 47 shows an example of the setting confirmation screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 during the setting confirmation. The setting confirmation screen is started to be displayed in response to the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receiving the setting confirmation command (see S704) from the main control unit 20 side.
On the setting confirmation screen of this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed together with information for notifying users such as hall staff that the setting is being confirmed (characters "setting confirmation" in the figure). Guidance information for the operation required for this is displayed (in the figure, the characters of "setting history list", the icon of the effect button 13 and the characters of "determine with" are applicable).

Here, in this example, the operation guide for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed on the setting confirmation screen, that is, the notification screen during the setting confirmation as described above, and the user follows the operation guide. The transition to the setting history confirmation screen Gs shown in FIG. 46 is performed in response to the predetermined operation (operation of the effect button 13 in this example).
This can be rephrased as the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) accepting the display instruction of the setting history confirmation screen Gs while displaying the operation guide on the notification screen during the setting confirmation.
As a result, the user can be made to grasp two pieces of information, that is, the timing when the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed and the operation required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs only by the process of displaying the setting confirmation screen. it can. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when presenting the information that requires notification to the user in displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

Further, the setting history confirmation screen Gs of this example can be transitioned to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information. For example, even if the number of stored history information is "8" as shown in FIG. 46, all the pages of the second to fifth pages can be displayed according to the page switching operation. In other words, all pages that do not have history information, including empty pages, can be displayed.
This makes it possible for the user to intuitively grasp how many histories the pachinko gaming machine 1 can hold and display at the maximum.

FIG. 48 shows an example of history display information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
The history display information is information constructed by the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 accumulating the corresponding history information in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 for each occurrence of the target event of the history display.

An area for storing history display information (hereinafter referred to as "history storage area") is defined in the work area of the RAM 243, and the CPU 241 executes a process (see FIGS. 52 and 53) described later. Then, each time the target event occurs, the corresponding history information is added to the history storage area.
Hereinafter, the history information that is added one by one each time the target event occurs is referred to as "individual history information". In this example, since a maximum of 50 histories can be displayed, the history storage area in the RAM 243 is set as an area in which 50 individual history information of histories 0 to 49 can be stored. ..

As the individual history information, as shown in the figure, the information of "year", "month", "hour", and "minute" required for displaying the date and time information of the history and the type of history (setting change, setting confirmation, or error) are displayed. It includes the information of "type" to be represented and the information of "data". In the "data" information, when "type" is a setting change and setting confirmation, information indicating the changed setting value Ve and the setting confirmed setting value Ve due to the setting change is stored, and the "type" information is stored. If is an "error", information indicating the error type is stored.

As the history display information, for example, a checksum area and a storage area for the latest history position information are provided in the first area, and the area following these areas is used as a storage area for individual history information.
The checksum area is an area for storing the sum value calculated from the stored information in the entire storage area of the individual history information. The role of this sum value will be described later.
The latest history position information is information representing the storage position of the last added individual history information on the RAM 243.

Here, since the RAM 243 has a relatively high information reading speed, it is desirable to use the history display information held in the work area as described above for the quick display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
However, the backup power supply is not connected to the RAM 243, and it is impossible to keep the stored information when the power supply is cut off. The setting operation history displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs is expected to be a history over a relatively long period of time, for example, several weeks or one month. Therefore, only RAM 243 is the history display information. If the storage destination memory is used, the history information will be lost every time the power is cut off, and the history display cannot be performed properly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the memory 244 shown in FIG. 3 (that is, the memory capable of holding the stored information even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off) is provided as the memory accessible to the CPU 243, and the memory 244 is provided with the memory 244. The history display information stored in the work area of the RAM 243 is backed up and stored.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining an example of backup operation of history display information as an embodiment.
In this example, the memory 244 is provided with a plurality of areas as areas for backing up and storing the history display information. Specifically, two areas, a first history storage area and a second history storage area, are set in the figure.
The CPU 241 copies the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 to each of the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244.

As described above, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed during the setting confirmation (that is, the state immediately after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on again), in other words, through the power cutoff of the pachinko game machine 1. After doing. Since the history display information in the RAM 243 is cleared (cannot be retained) when the power is cut off, the CPU 241 displays the history backed up in the first history storage area or the second history storage area of the memory 244 at the time of its own startup. The information is written back to the history storage area of the RAM 243. As a result, it is possible to obtain a state in which appropriate history display information is stored in the RAM 243 before the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed.
Then, the CPU 241 causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display the setting history confirmation screen Gs based on the history display information stored in the RAM 243.
As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of displaying the setting operation history properly and promptly.

In this example, on the premise that the history display information in the RAM 243 is backed up in the memory 244 in this way, a plurality of history storage areas such as the first and second history storage areas described above are provided to take a plurality of backups. It is supposed to be.
By taking a plurality of backups of the history display information in this way, it is possible to improve the display resistance of the setting history confirmation screen Gs against the storage data corruption in the memory 244. That is, even if data is damaged in a certain history storage area, the setting history confirmation screen Gs can be displayed using the history display information of another history storage area. Therefore, the storage data in the memory 244 is damaged. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which proper history information cannot be displayed due to this.

Here, in this example, the copy (backup) of the history display information to the memory 244 is executed every time new history information (individual history information) is added to the history display information in the RAM 243. That is, in response to the addition of new individual history information to the history display information of the RAM 243 in response to the occurrence of the target event, the history display information after the addition is stored in the first and second history storage areas in the memory 244. Copy to each.

For example, it is conceivable to copy the history display information to the memory 244 at regular intervals, but in that case, the power is cut off unexpectedly immediately after the latest individual history information is added (power cutoff of the pachinko gaming machine 1). If this happens, the power will be cut off without the latest history being reflected in the history display information of the memory 244, and when the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed at the next startup, the latest history may not be displayed. obtain.
On the other hand, if copying is performed for each history addition as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the stored contents of the history do not match between the RAM 243 and the memory 244 due to an unexpected power failure. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of display defects of history information.

It should be noted that copying to the memory 244 each time individual history information is added is just an example, and copying can be performed at other timings, for example, copying is performed each time the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. is there.

FIG. 50 shows an example of additional processing of individual history information in the history display information.
In this example, the storage area of the individual history information in the RAM 243 is a ring buffer area capable of holding 50 individual history information.
Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, in a state where 50 pieces of history t0 to history t49 are stored as individual history information, it is necessary to newly add individual history information as history t50. Suppose.
In this state, the latest history position indicated by the latest history position information described above is a storage position of individual history information as history t49 as shown in the figure.

When adding the individual history information as the history t50, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, the CPU 241 updates the latest history position to the next position, that is, the storage position of the history t0. Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, the individual history information of the history t50 to be added is stored in the storage position of the individual history information represented by the latest history position (that is, the history t0 is overwritten).
As a result, when adding new individual history information while the individual history information is held to the maximum, the oldest individual history information is overwritten by the latest individual history information, and as a result, the history display data is displayed. In the storage area of the individual history information, the latest to the past 50 pieces of individual history information are stored. That is, the number of individual history information to be retained does not exceed the upper limit of 50 (required for display).

In this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed based on the history display information in which the individual history information is stored according to the mode of the ring buffer.
When individual history information is stored in the form of a ring buffer, the latest history position is managed, and the new order or old order of each history information is naturally grasped by the storage position of each history information based on the latest history position. Will be done. Therefore, when displaying the history list in the new order or the old order on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is not necessary to specify the new order and the old order of each history information by referring to the time information included in each history information. .. That is, it is possible to reduce the processing load when displaying the history in a list in the order of newest or oldest.

Here, in this example, the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is executed only on the condition that the setting is being confirmed, and the setting history is confirmed during the setting change (during the setting change process in step S115). Do not display screen Gs.
Since the set value Ve can be changed during the setting change, it is not desirable to display the history related to the setting change during the setting change because it may cause confusion for the user.
By not displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs during the setting change, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the history display of the setting value Ve.

Subsequently, the process for realizing the operation related to the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs as the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 55.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the history information initial setting process (S2001) at the time of power-on. The process is a process executed by the CPU 241 as a part of the effect control main process described with reference to FIG. 41. Specifically, the CPU 241 completes various initial setting processes in step S2000 upon startup. The process of S2001 is executed. As described above, the process of step S2001 is a process for holding the information necessary for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs in the RAM 243.

In FIG. 51, in step S2301, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the first history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work (RAM 243). Here, if the target event of the history display occurs at a stage prior to the current startup, the history information update process of step S2160 described later is performed on the memory 244 (FIG. 53 :). In particular, the history display information is stored in each of the first and second history storage areas in step S2406). In the process of step S2301, among the history display information stored in the memory 244 in this way, the history display information of the first history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area.

In the following step S2302, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the sum value of the first history storage area is abnormal (checksum processing). That is, with respect to the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "first history display information") stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 from the first history storage area as described above, the stored value of the entire storage area of the individual history information. The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the first history display information.
The sum value in the checksum area was calculated from the stored value in the storage area of the individual history information by the process of step S2405 in the history information update process (FIG. 53) of step S2160 when backing up the history display information to the memory 244. Therefore, by determining the match / mismatch of the sum values in the checksum process of step S2302, it is possible to determine whether the stored values in the entire storage area of the individual history information match / mismatch with those at the time of backup. Is. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the backed up history information is abnormal (for example, whether or not it is illegally rewritten).

If it is determined in step S2302 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting process in step S2001. That is, if the history information backed up in the first history storage area of the memory 244 is normal, the state in which the history information of the first history storage area is held in the RAM 243 is continued. That is, the history display process (FIG. 54) of step 2050, which will be described later, is executed based on the history information of the first history storage area held in the RAM 243 in this way.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2302 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the second history storage area in the memory 244 to the internal work in step S2303. .. That is, the history display information of the second history storage area is transferred to the RAM 243 and stored in the history storage area (that is, the history display information of the first history storage area stored in step S2301 is overwritten).

Next, in step S2304, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the sum value of the second history storage area. That is, with respect to the history display information (hereinafter referred to as "second history display information") of the second history storage area stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243 as described above, the storage value of the entire storage area of the individual history information is stored. The sum value is calculated from the above, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value stored in the checksum area in the second history display information. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the history information backed up in the second history storage area is abnormal.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the sum values match, that is, the sum values are normal, the CPU 241 ends the initial setting process in step S2001. That is, if the history information of the second history storage area stored in the RAM 243 is normal, the state in which the history information of the second history storage area is held in the RAM 243 continues, and in this case, the second history storage area. The history display process (FIG. 54) based on the history information of is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 2304 that the sum values do not match, that is, the sum values are abnormal, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2305 to clear the history display information, and ends the initial setting process in step S2001. In the clearing process of step S2305, the history display information stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244 is cleared together with the history display information stored in the history storage area of the RAM 243.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the history information according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display.
The target events in this example are setting change, setting confirmation, and error occurrence, and the CPU 241 updates the history information according to the occurrence of these events based on the effect control command from the main control unit 20 side. It is designed to run. Specifically, regarding the setting change and the setting confirmation, the history information is updated according to the reception of the setting change end command, the setting value command, and the setting confirmation command from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52A). Further, regarding the error, the history information is updated according to the reception of various error commands from the main control unit 20 side (see FIG. 52B).
In this example, each of the processes of FIGS. 52A and 52B is executed as one of the command processes (see FIG. 43) of step S2130 described above.

FIG. 52A shows the setting-related command processing S2130e corresponding to the setting-related command, which is a command related to the setting change and the setting confirmation.
First, the CPU 241 confirms whether any of the setting confirmation command, the setting confirmation end command, the setting change time command, the setting change in progress command, and the setting change end command has been received by the processing of steps S2150 to S2154.
Specifically, in step S2150, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received, and if the setting confirmation command has not been received, it is determined in step S2151 whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2152 whether or not the setting change command has been received, and if the setting change command has not been received, whether or not the setting change command has been received in step S2153. Is determined. If the setting changing command has not been received, it is determined in step S2154 whether or not the setting changing end command has been received.

Here, regarding step S2150, the setting checking command includes the notification information of the setting value Ve as described with reference to FIG. 15, and in step S2150 in this example, the setting value " It is determined whether or not a command including any of the notification information of "1" to "6" has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying the set value Ve in the usable range Re is received as the setting checking command, not in the usable range Ru.
Further, in this example, as for the command for changing the setting in step S2152, similarly, the command for notifying one of the set values Ve (“1” to “6”) in the usable range Re, not in the used range Ru, is used. Determine if it has been received.
Regarding the command for notifying the set value Ve in this way, the significance of allowing the command for notifying the value in the usable range Re instead of the used range Ru will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2150 that the setting confirmation end command (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation scenario registration process in step S2155, and proceeds to step S2159.
If it is determined in step S2151 that the setting confirmation end command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting confirmation end scenario registration process in step S2156 to proceed to step S2159, and in step S2152, the setting change command (setting value "1"". If it is determined that ~ "6") has been received, the process proceeds to step S2159 as it is.
Further, when it is determined in step S2153 that the setting changing command has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change start scenario registration process in step S2157 to proceed to step S2159, and determines that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154. In that case, the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158, and the process proceeds to step S2159.
By executing the scenario registration processes of steps S2155, S2156, S2157, and S2158, the effect operations corresponding to the setting confirmation, the setting confirmation end, the setting change start, and the setting change end are executed, respectively.

In step S2159, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the spec specification / setting information command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not any of the spec specification command and the set value command has been received. Although the description by illustration is omitted, the spec specification command is information representing the specifications of the game machine 1 transmitted by the CPU 201 of the main control unit 20 at the time of startup (for example, the winning probability of a big hit and the number of steps of the set value Ve to be used. It is a command to notify (information to be represented, etc.). The set value command is a command transmitted by the CPU 201 in step S808 (FIG. 17) in the main loop preprocessing.
In both the spec specification command and the set value command, the upper byte is set to a specific value representing the spec information of the game machine 1, and in step S2159, it is determined whether or not the command in which the upper byte is set to the specific value is received. Determines whether or not either the spec specification command or the set value command has been received.

If it is determined in step S2159 that neither the spec specification command nor the setting value command has been received and the spec specification / setting information command has not been received, the CPU 241 ends the setting-related command processing in step S2130e. That is, in this case, the storage process of the set value in the RAM 243 according to step S2163 described later is not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the spec specification / setting information command has been received, the CPU 241 stores the spec information in the RAM 243. That is, the value of the upper byte of the received spec specification command or the set value command is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.

In step S2161 following step S2160, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the setting is indefinite. That is, it is determined whether or not the received spec specification / setting information command is not a setting value command but a spec specification command. Here, in this example, the lower byte of the spec specification command is "0FH", and the lower byte of the setting value command is a value corresponding to the setting value Ve. Therefore, in step S2161, whether or not the spec specification / setting information command is not a setting value command but a spec specification command depends on whether or not the lower byte of the received spec specification / setting information command is "0FH". Judge (whether or not the setting is indefinite).

When it is determined that the lower byte is not "0FH" and the setting is not indefinite (that is, it is a setting value command), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2162, and the setting information determines whether or not it is in the usable range Re. That is, whether or not the value indicated by the identification data (see FIG. 16) of the set value Ve included in the received set value command is within the range of "00" to "05" corresponding to the usable range Re. judge.
When the value indicated by the identification data is a value within the usable range Re and the setting information is determined to be the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the set value information in the RAM 243 in step S2163. That is, the identification data is stored in a predetermined area in the work area of the RAM 243.
In response to the execution of the storage process in step S2163, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2162 that the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 passes the storage process of step S2163 and proceeds to step S2164.
If it is determined in step S2161 that the setting is undefined (that is, it is a spec specification command), the CPU 241 passes the determination process of step S2162 and the storage process of S2163 and proceeds to step S2164.

The determination process in step S2162 functions as an abnormality determination process for the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243. However, the significance of determining whether or not the value is within the usable range Re instead of the actual usable range Ru as an abnormality determination of the set value Ve on the effect control unit 24 side will be described later.

In step S2164, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is time to change the setting or confirm the setting. In this determination, for example, the command determined to have been received in the current setting value-related command processing (S2130e) is the first "setting value command" after receiving the "setting change end command", or the "setting checking command". It can be performed as a judgment as to whether or not it was.

If the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2165 to set the history type. That is, for the individual history information to be newly added, the above-mentioned "type" value and "data" value are set. Specifically, when the setting is changed, the value representing "setting change" is used as the value of "type", and the value representing the current setting value Ve (setting value Ve that has been set) is used as the value of "data". set. In addition, if it is at the time of setting confirmation, the value indicating "setting confirmation" as the value of "type" is set as the value of "data" and the setting confirmed value Ve (setting value Ve notified by the command during setting confirmation). Are set respectively.

In response to executing the set process of step S2165, the CPU 241 executes the history information update process of step S2166.
The history information update process in step S2166 will be described again.

In step S2167 following step S2166, the CPU 241 executes a process of transmitting the set value information to the liquid crystal side. That is, the process of transmitting the information representing the set value Ve notified by the set value command to the liquid crystal control unit 40 is performed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 36 can display the set value Ve notified by the set value command, such as the set value Ve set in the setting change process.
In response to the execution of the transmission process in step S2167, the CPU 241 ends the process in step S2130e.

FIG. 52B shows the process S2130f corresponding to the error command.
First, the CPU 241 executes error notification in step S2170. That is, the notification process (notification process using a predetermined effect means) is executed according to the error type specified from the received error command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the value of "type" to the value representing "error" and the value of "data" to the error number (value representing the error type) for the individual history information to be newly added as the history type set processing in step S2171. ), The history information update process of step S2166 is executed, and then the process of step S2130f is completed.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the history information update process in step S2166. The update process is a process of updating the history display information of the RAM 243 so that the individual history information is added according to the newly generated target event.
First, in step S2401, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the latest history position information is within the specified range (that is, whether or not it is within the range of 0 to 49 in this example). If the latest history position information is not within the specified range (that is, if it is 50 or more), the CPU 241 ends the update process in step S2160. That is, in this case, since the latest history position information has an abnormality, the history display information is not updated.

If the latest history position information is a value within the specified range, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2402 and updates the latest history position information to the value of the next position. The value of the latest history position information here is updated within the range of 0 to 49, and as can be understood from the explanation of FIG. 42 above, when the value is "49", the next position. "0" will be set as the value of (that is, the value will be cyclically incremented within the range of 0 to 49).

Next, in step S2403, the CPU 241 acquires the time information (year / month / day / hour / minute) of the RTC function unit, and in step S2404, performs a process of saving the history information in the area indicated by the latest history position information. That is, on the RAM 243 in which the latest history position information indicates individual history information including the acquired time information and the information of "type" and "data" set in the corresponding process among steps S2165 and S2171 described in FIG. 52 above. It is stored in the storage area of.

As individual history information, it is also possible to save (display) the energization time from power-on instead of the time information by RTC. As a result, in a gaming machine that does not have an RTC function unit, it is possible to display information that can specify the occurrence time of the target event as history information.

In step S2405 following step S2404, the CPU 241 calculates the sum value of the history information of the internal work and saves it in the checksum area. That is, for the history display information in the RAM 243, a sum value is calculated from the stored value of the entire storage area of the individual history information including the individual history information newly added in step S2404, and the sum value is used as the history display information. It is stored in the checksum area in.

Further, in the following step S2406, the CPU 241 performs a process of transferring the history display information of the internal work to the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, and finishes the update process of the step S2160.
As a result, new individual history information is added, and history display information including a sum value reflecting the addition of the individual history information is stored in the first and second history storage areas of the memory 244, respectively.

Here, as understood from the above description, in this example, when backing up the history information stored in the RAM 243 to the memory 244, a sum value is calculated from the history information stored in the RAM 243, and the sum value is used as the sum value. The history information stored in the RAM 243 and the history information stored in the RAM 243 are stored in the memory 244.
As a method of calculating the sum value for determining the abnormality of the backup information and saving it in the memory 244, first, only the history information stored in the RAM 243 is copied to the memory 244, and then the copy is stored in the memory 244. It is also conceivable to calculate the sum value from the history information and store the sum value in the memory 244. However, in that case, if the copying of the history information from the RAM 243 to the memory 244 fails, the sum value itself becomes a correct value, that is, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the checksum processing (S2302 or S2304). In reality, inaccurate history information is backed up, which may induce display problems of history information.
With the above history information and sum value copying method, if copying of the history information to the memory 244 fails, the checksum processing determines that the history information is abnormal. Therefore, the memory Since the history information stored in 244 can be prevented from being used for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent inaccurate history information from being displayed.

Subsequently, the process for displaying the history information based on the history display information held in the RAM 243 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 and 55.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the history display process (S2050). As can be understood from the explanation of FIG. 41 above, this history display process is executed once per frame period in this example.

In FIG. 54, the CPU 241 determines in step S2501 whether or not the setting is being confirmed. Whether or not the setting is being confirmed can be determined by whether or not the above-mentioned setting checking command is received.
If the setting is not being confirmed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, in this example, the setting history confirmation screen Gs should be displayed only during the setting confirmation.

On the other hand, if the setting is being confirmed, the CPU 241 confirms the history display flag in step S2502. This history display flag is an identifier (initial value is OFF) that is set to ON in step S2504, which will be described later.
When the display start condition of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is not satisfied, the history display flag is off, so that the CPU 241 proceeds from step S2502 to step S2503.

In step S2503, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the display instruction operation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs is the operation of the effect button 13, and the CPU 241 determines in step S2503 whether or not the effect button 13 is operated.

As understood from the explanations of steps S2501 to S2503 so far, the CPU 241 accepts the display instruction operation of the setting history confirmation screen Gs on condition that the setting is being confirmed.

If there is no display instruction operation in step S2503, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050.
On the other hand, if there is a display instruction operation, the CPU 241 sets (turns on) the history display flag in step S2504, and sets the display page identifier P to "0" in the subsequent step S2505. The display page identifier P is a value for identifying the display page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs.

In response to the execution of the process of step S2505, the CPU 241 executes the history information screen creation process in step S2508. Then, the history display process of step S2050 is completed.
The history information screen creation process in step S2508 is a process for transmitting information necessary for displaying the screen of the page indicated by the display page identifier P to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. That is, when step S2508 is executed following step S2505, information necessary for displaying the screen for the first page (P = 0) is transmitted.
The details of the history information screen creation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Further, in the previous step S2502, when it is determined that the history display flag is on (that is, the state after the first page is already displayed), the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2506 and whether or not there is a page switching operation. To judge. That is, in this example, it is determined whether or not any of the direction indicating keys of the cross key 16 has been operated.
If there is a page switching operation, the CPU 241 proceeds to the history information screen creation process in step S2508.

Here, the history information screen creation process of step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.
In FIG. 55, first, in step S2601, the CPU 241 calculates the head position Idx of the history display. That is, the position of the storage area (position on the RAM 243) of the individual history information to be displayed at the head position of the page to be displayed from now on is calculated as the head position Idx. Specifically, the start position Idx is calculated by "latest history position-P x α" (however, α is the number of individual history information displayed per page: "10" in this example). For example, when displaying the first page (P = 0), the head position Idx is obtained as the "latest history position" from the "latest history position −0 × α". Alternatively, when displaying the third page (P = 2), the head position Idx is obtained as "latest history position-2α".

In step S2602 following step S2601, the CPU 241 sends a command to the page number. That is, the information of the page number specified from the page identifier P (that is, the page number of the page to be displayed) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command.

Next, the CPU 241 sets the display number to "1" in step S2603, and then performs the processing of steps S2604 to S2610 to display the information required for screen display of the display target page (specifically, individual history information and its display number). Is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40.
First, in step S2604 following step S2603, the CPU 241 refers to the history information of the area indicated by the head position Idx. That is, the stored information of the area indicated by the head position Idx in the history storage area (history display information) of the RAM 243 is referred to.

Next, in step S2605, the CPU 241 determines whether or not there is history information, that is, whether or not individual history information is stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx.
When the individual history information is stored and it is determined that there is history information, the CPU 241 executes the command transmission process of the display number in step S2606, and then executes the command transmission process of the history information in step S2607. That is, the display number and the individual history information acquired from the area indicated by the head position Idx are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 by the liquid crystal control command, respectively.

In step S2608 following step S2607, the CPU 241 updates the head position Idx to a value corresponding to the storage area of the individual history information in the past (Idx ← Idx-1). This update process is executed so that the value of the start position Idx is periodically updated within the range of 0 to 49 (that is, when the start position Idx is "0", it is updated to "49").

Further, in the following step S2609, the CPU 241 increments the display number by 1, and in step S2610, determines whether or not the transmission process for one page (transmission of the individual history information and the display number) is completed. This determination can be realized, for example, as a determination as to whether or not the value of the display number is α or more.

If the transmission process for one page is not completed, the CPU 241 executes the processes of steps S2604 to S2610 again. As a result, when the individual history information for one page is saved, the transmission process of the individual history information and the display number thereof is repeated until the transmission process for one page is completed. When the stored individual history information is less than one page, the individual history information is transmitted and the display number thereof is transmitted only for the stored individual history information (see S2605).

Even if the individual history information is not stored in the area indicated by the head position Idx (that is, even if the stored value is "0"), the individual history information by "0" is directly controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 40 on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side. It can also be sent by command. In that case, on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, for the individual history information that has received such a liquid crystal control command by "0", a display indicating no history is displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs (for example, "-" illustrated in FIG. 38. Display control is performed so that "---" is displayed.
According to this method, the determination process in step S2605 can be omitted.

Further, when the individual history information is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the individual history information to be transmitted is the history information (setting change history information) for the setting change, and then it is determined. In the case of setting change history information, it is also possible to confirm an abnormality of the set value Ve included in the history information. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re (whether or not it is outside the range of "0" to "5").
Then, when the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re and it is recognized that the set value Ve in the individual history information of the transmission target is abnormal, the liquid crystal control unit 40 is instructed to display the abnormality. Send. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark meaning an error). That is, it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.
Alternatively, if an abnormality is found in the set value Ve in the individual history information to be transmitted, the information of the set value Ve included in the individual history information may not be transmitted. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to prevent the setting value Ve of the individual history information in which an abnormality is found in the setting value Ve from being displayed, and it is possible to notify that the setting change history is not normal.

In response to the determination in step S2610 that the transmission process for one page is completed, the CPU 241 ends the history information screen creation process in step S2508.
When the transmission process for one page is completed, a liquid crystal control command indicating that fact can be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side.

Here, in response to receiving various liquid crystal control commands transmitted by the above processing, the liquid crystal control unit 40 corresponds to one page of the setting history confirmation screen Gs according to the mode illustrated in FIG. 46 above. The image display operation by the liquid crystal display device 36 is controlled so that the screen display is performed.

The description returns to FIG.
When the CPU 241 determines in step S2506 that the page switching operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not there is an end instruction operation, that is, whether or not there is an operation instructing the end of the display of the setting history confirmation screen Gs. In this example, the end instruction operation is an operation of the effect button 13, and therefore, the CPU 241 determines in step S2509 whether or not the effect button 13 is operated.

When it is determined that the effect button 13 has not been operated and the end instruction operation has not been performed, the CPU 241 ends the history display process in step S2050. As described above, the history display process of step S2050 is performed once per frame period, and the processes after step S2501 are executed again in the next frame period.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the end instruction operation has been performed in step S2509, the CPU 241 clears (turns off) the history display flag in step S2510, sets the demo screen display command in step S2511, and then sets the history of step S2050. Finish the display process.
The process of step S2511 is a process of setting a liquid crystal control command in the command buffer for instructing the liquid crystal control unit 40 to execute the above-mentioned demo screen display for waiting for customers.

Here, according to the above processing, when the individual history information does not exist at all for a certain page, the liquid crystal control unit 40 side is only notified of the page number (S2602), and the individual history information and its display number. Is not sent.
On the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, when the page number is transmitted in this way but the individual history information or the display number is not transmitted, the page number information of the page and each display number are displayed as the screen of the corresponding page. The liquid crystal display device 36 is made to display a screen showing information indicating that the individual history information does not exist for each case (for example, the notation of “−−−−” in FIG. 38).
As a result, it is possible to display all pages including empty pages that do not have history information. That is, it is possible to transition to all pages regardless of the number of stored history information.

It is also possible to hide pages for which there is no individual history information. In that case, the CPU 241 does not cause the liquid crystal control unit 40 to display the screen for the current display page P in response to the determination in step S2605 (FIG. 55) that there is no history information at the stage where the display number = 1. You can give instructions and so on.

As can be understood from the processes of FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, in this example, when the individual history information to be displayed is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, the individual history information is individually transmitted one by one. There is.
As a result, individual history information can be transmitted by a command.
Therefore, the program design on the liquid crystal control unit 40 side can be facilitated.

In the above, an example of transmitting the history information of the corresponding page for each page switching is given, but the history information for all pages is first transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 40 side, and the liquid crystal control unit 40 is used when switching pages. A page switching command may be sent to the side to instruct switching of the displayed page.

[5-3. About the data type of the set value in the embodiment]

Here, in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit 24, an area for storing the set value Ve notified by the setting confirmation command or the set value command from the main control unit 20 (hereinafter referred to as “notification setting value storage area A1”). ) And a storage area for the setting value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value storage area A2") that constitutes a part of the individual history information required for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs. ..
Then, in the present embodiment, in the operation program of the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24, the program variable of the setting value Ve stored in the notification setting value storage area A1 (hereinafter referred to as "notification setting value Pv1") and the history setting value. The type (data type) of the program variable (hereinafter referred to as "history setting value Pv2") of the setting value Ve stored in the storage area A2 is the same. Specifically, in this example, by setting the types of the notification setting value Pv1 and the history setting value Pv2 to the same "unsigned 8 bits", the number of bits of the setting value Ve stored in the history setting value storage area A2 is set to the notification. It matches the number of bits of the set value Ve stored in the value storage area A1.
As a result, it is possible to prevent information loss when the set value Ve stored in the notification set value storage area A1 is stored in the history set value storage area A2 (see S2163 to S2166 in FIG. 52A). That is, since the number of bits of the history setting value Pv2 is smaller than the number of bits of the notification setting value Pv1, a situation occurs in which the setting value Ve acquired from the notification setting value storage area A1 cannot be properly stored in the history setting value storage area A2. This can be prevented, and accurate information can be displayed as the setting history information.

FIG. 56 illustrates the numerical value of the set value Ve that can be expressed by the above-mentioned “unsigned 8 bits”.
By setting 8 bits, 6 values of "1" to "6" can be expressed as the set value Ve as shown in the figure, and a value larger than "6", in other words, an abnormal value outside the usable range Re can be expressed. It is possible to express.
That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store an abnormal value other than the value of the usable range Re as the set value Ve, so that when an abnormality occurs, the cause can be easily identified. ing.

[5-4. Setting suggestion production]

The effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute control for displaying a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value Ve to the player.
As such a setting suggestion effect, the effect control unit 24 of this example includes a suggestion effect by the left pattern as described below, a suggestion effect by a mini character notice, a suggestion effect at the end of a big hit, and a suggestion effect by SU (step-up) notice. Is controlled to appear.

(Suggestion production by the design on the left)

First, the suggestive effect by the left symbol will be described. The left symbol referred to here means the "left" decorative symbol among the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a left symbol lottery process for drawing the contents of the left symbol.
First, the CPU 241 of the effect control unit 24 determines in step S2701 whether or not the special mode 1 is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the mode of the game is a predetermined mode as the "special mode 1".
If it is not the special mode 1, the CPU 241 determines whether or not it is the special mode 2 in step S2702, and if it is not the special mode 2, it determines the continuous reach look-ahead in step S2703 (after the look-ahead, the display of the decorative symbol is predetermined for the fluctuation). It is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect controlled by the mode) is won.

If the continuous reach look-ahead is not won in step S2703, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area (notification set value storage area A1 described above) of the RAM 243 as the set value information acquisition process in step S2705. In step S2706, the process of acquiring the offset value from the offset table is performed based on the set value information, and in the subsequent step S2707, the content of the left symbol is determined based on the lottery value.

Here, FIG. 58 shows an example of the left symbol lottery table used in step S2707, and FIG. 59 shows an example of the left symbol lottery offset table used in step S2706. Each of these tables is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the left symbol lottery table, the winning probabilities for each symbol content (10 symbol contents of symbol 0 to symbol 9 in this example) to be drawn are "1" to "6". It is set for each set value Ve of. In the figure, as a value representing the winning probability, it is represented by the distribution value on the premise that the random number for lottery can take 10000 values from 0 to 9999, but it is shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 above. As in the case, the threshold value for the lottery random number is actually stored. The same applies to the tables shown in FIGS. 63, 65, 68, 72, and 74, which will be described later.

In the offset table for the left symbol lottery shown in FIG. 59, the corresponding offset value is stored for each set value Ve of "1" to "6". Specifically, "0" for the set value Ve "1", "1" for the set value Ve "2", "2" for the set value Ve "3", and the set value Ve " "3" is stored for "4", "4" is stored for the set value Ve "5", and "5" is stored for the set value Ve "6".

In step S2706 of FIG. 57, an offset value corresponding to the current set value Ve acquired in step S2705 is acquired according to the offset table for left symbol lottery shown in FIG. 59. Then, in step S2707, among the lottery tables for each set value Ve in the left symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 58, the lottery table at the position (address) specified by the offset value acquired in step S2706 is selected. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value "1" located at the top of the left symbol lottery table (that is, stored at the address with the lowest number) is selected with the offset value "1". If "", the lottery table with the setting value "2" located second from the top in the left symbol lottery table, and if the offset value is "2", the setting value "2" located third from the top in the left symbol lottery table. Select the lottery table stored at the position specified by the offset value, such as selecting the lottery table of "3".

If the current state does not correspond to either the first special mode or the second special mode by the above series of processing and the continuous reach look-ahead is not won, the winning probability based on the set value Ve indicates the symbol on the left. The contents will be drawn. In other words, the appearance rate of the symbols 0 to 9 of the left symbol is different depending on the set value Ve, which suggests the type of the set value Ve to the player depending on the appearance rate of the specific symbol content of the left symbol. The production is realized.

As shown in FIG. 57, when it is determined in step S2701 that the first special mode is set, the CPU 241 passes the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 and ends a series of processes. That is, under the first special mode, the lottery of the symbol contents of the left symbol is not performed.
Further, when it is determined in step S2702 that the mode is the second special mode, and in each case where it is determined in step S2703 that the continuous reach look-ahead is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2704 without referring to the set value Ve. The offset value is acquired from the offset table, and the process proceeds to the table selection process in step S2707. That is, in this case, the offset value of "0" in the offset table for the left symbol lottery is acquired (S2704), and the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected from the left symbol lottery table (S2707). .. Therefore, under the second special mode and under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, the lottery of the symbol contents of the left symbol is performed with a fixed winning probability that does not depend on the set value Ve. In other words, the setting suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed.

As described above, in this example, the setting suggestion effect using the left symbol is not performed under the continuous reach look-ahead winning state, but as a result, the symbol content of the left symbol won in the left symbol lottery process is continuously reach look-ahead. It is possible to prevent the content of the selected left symbol from becoming inconsistent with the symbol content.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another example of the left symbol lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, the table shown in FIG. 61 is prepared as the offset table for the left symbol lottery stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same contents as that shown in FIG. 59 is stored as a first left symbol lottery offset table (FIG. 61A), and a second left symbol lottery offset different from the first left symbol lottery offset table. The table is stored (FIG. 61B).
In the second left symbol lottery offset table, the same offset value (“2” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The left symbol lottery process shown in FIG. 60 executes the processes of steps S2710 and S2711 in place of the process of step S2704 shown in FIG. 57 as the processes executed in each of the second special mode and the continuous reach look-ahead winning. The point to do is different.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the set value information in step S2710, and acquires the offset value from the second offset table based on the set value information in the subsequent step S2711. , Proceed to the lottery table selection process of step S2707.
Since the offset value acquired in step S2711 is the same regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S2707 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve.
In this alternative example, in step S2706, the offset table for the first left symbol lottery shown in FIG. 61A is used as the offset table.

In this way, as a method for performing the left symbol lottery that does not depend on the set value Ve in response to the continuous reach look-ahead winning in the second special mode, a fixed offset value is acquired without referring to the set value Ve. The method is not limited to the method, and as shown in FIG. 61B, the offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve is referred to, and the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve. You can also.

(Suggestion production by mini character notice)

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the mini character notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as a premise, in the game machine 1 of this example, it is possible to appear two types of mini character notice production, the first mini character notice production and the second mini character notice production. Regarding the first mini character advance notice effect and the second mini character advance notice effect, it is assumed that the lottery process itself for whether or not to make the advance notice effect appear is already executed as a process different from the process shown in FIG. 62.
In this example, the first mini character advance notice effect is not an effect that suggests the set value Ve, but an effect that suggests the set value Ve can appear as the second mini character advance notice effect.

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 determines in step S2801 whether or not the mini character notice effect has been won. If the mini-character notice effect has not been won, the CPU 241 does not execute the series of processes described below, and ends the mini-character notice lottery process of FIG. 62.

If the mini character notice effect has been won, the CPU 241 determines in step S2802 whether or not the winning content is the first mini character notice.
If the first mini character notice effect has been won and it is determined that the winning content is the first mini character notice, the CPU 241 is included in the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 20 as the change pattern information acquisition process in step S2803. After performing the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern information to be obtained, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the fluctuation pattern won in step S2804, and the lottery table is selected based on the offset value in the subsequent step S2805. ..

FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mini character notice lottery table used in step S2805, and FIG. 64 shows an example of the first notice offset table used in step S2804. Each of these tables is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242.
In the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64, a short fluctuation pattern (“short variation P” in the figure), a reach variation pattern (“reach variation P” in the figure), and a super reach variation pattern (“SP reach P” in the figure) An offset value is set for each). In this example, the short fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 4s", "normal fluctuation 6s", "normal fluctuation 8s", and "normal fluctuation 12s", and the reach fluctuation pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "normal reach", and the super reach fluctuation corresponds to. The patterns correspond to the above-mentioned "Super Reach 1", "Super Reach 2", "Super Reach 3", and "Super Reach 4". 2 offset values are defined for each.

In the first mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 63, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the first mini character notice. In this example, there are five types of contents of the first mini character notice, "None", "Holding change explanation", "Strong notice explanation", "Probability change mode explanation", and "Character introduction". Three types of tables, Table 1 to Table 3, which determine the distribution of winning probabilities for the contents, are prepared.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2804, an offset value is acquired from the first notice offset table shown in FIG. 64 based on the information of the winning variation pattern specified from the acquired variation pattern information, and the offset value of step S2805 is obtained. In the selection process, the lottery table is selected from the first mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 63 based on the offset value. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as an offset value, table 1 is selected. Further, if the winning fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, the table 2 is selected, and if the winning fluctuation pattern is the super reach fluctuation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, the table 3 is selected. Be selected.

In step S2806 following step S2805, the CPU 241 determines the content of the first mini character notice based on the selected value, and finishes the mini character notice lottery process shown in FIG. 62. That is, the content of the first mini character notice is determined according to the distribution value in the table selected from the tables 1 to 3.
As described above, the first mini-character notice effect is not the effect according to the set value Ve, but the effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

Further, when the CPU 241 determines in the previous step S2802 that the winning content is not the first mini character notice, the CPU 241 acquires the setting change information in the step S2807, and determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the subsequent step S2808. That is, whether or not the latest individual history information among the individual history information stored for displaying the setting history confirmation screen Gs described above is acquired and the "type" information in the individual history information is "setting change". Is determined.

In step S2808, if the information of the "type" is not "setting change" and a negative result is obtained that the setting has not been changed, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2809 to execute the setting value information acquisition process. , Step S2810 obtains the offset value from the offset table based on the set value information, in step S2811, the process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed, and in step S2820, the second mini character notice is announced based on the lottery value. Determine the content.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the second mini character notice lottery table used in step S2811, and FIG. 66 shows an example of the second notice offset table used in step S2810 (note that ROM 242 is also used as these tables). It is stored in each predetermined area of).
In the second notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. In the second notice offset table of this example, the offset value is set not only for the set values Ve "1" to "6" but also for the values as "up" and "down". However, this will be described later.

In the second mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the winning probabilities are distributed according to the contents of the second mini character notice. In this example, the contents of the second mini character notice are "None", "Game property explanation", "Setting suggestion explanation 1", "Setting suggestion explanation 2", "Setting suggestion explanation 3", "Setting suggestion explanation 4", and "Setting suggestion explanation 5". 7 types are prepared, and as a lottery table, a table that defines the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents is set for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" and "for lowering". A total of 8 types are prepared accordingly.

In FIG. 62, in the acquisition process of step S2810, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2809 is acquired from the second advance notice offset table shown in FIG. 66, and in the selection process of step S2811, the offset value is acquired. A lottery table is selected from the second mini character notice lottery table shown in FIG. 65.
Then, in the determination process of step S2820 following step S2811, the process of determining the content of the second mini character notice is performed according to the selected lottery table.

Further, when the CPU 241 obtains an affirmative result that the above-mentioned "type" information is "setting change" and the setting has been changed in the previous step S2808, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2812 and proceeds to the previous and current setting value information. Is acquired, and in the following step S2813, it is determined whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time.
That is, among the individual history information whose "type" information is "setting change", the information of the setting value Ve included in the individual history information stored at the time of the previous setting change and the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243. The information of the set value Ve stored in is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the latter set value Ve is larger than the former set value Ve.

In step S2813, if the latest set value Ve is not larger than the previous set value Ve and the negative result is obtained that the set value is not higher than the previous time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2814 and first. The selection value is acquired, and in the subsequent step S2815, the offset value is acquired from the offset table based on the first selection value. That is, the offset value is acquired from the second notice offset table of FIG. Here, the first selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to the "lowering" shown in FIG. 66, and therefore, by executing the processes of steps S2814 and S2815 described above, the second notice is used. The offset value corresponding to "for lowering" is acquired from the offset table.
Then, in step S2816 following step S2815, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, executes a process of selecting a table corresponding to "lowering" from the second mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 65. , Proceed to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini character notice effect when the setting for lowering the set value Ve is changed is determined based on the "lowering" lottery table.

On the other hand, if an affirmative result that the set value is higher than the previous time is obtained in step S2813, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2817 to acquire the second selection value, and in the subsequent step S2818 based on the second selection value. Get the offset value from the offset table. The second selection value is a value for selecting an address corresponding to the “up” shown in FIG. 66. Therefore, when the processes of steps S2817 and S2818 are executed, the second notice offset table becomes “ The offset value corresponding to "for raising" is acquired.
Then, in step S2819 following step S2818, the CPU 241 selects a lottery table based on the offset value, that is, executes a process of selecting a table corresponding to "raising" from the second mini character notice lottery table of FIG. 65. , Proceed to the determination process of step S2820.
As a result, the content of the second mini character notice effect when the setting for raising the set value Ve is changed is determined based on the "raising" lottery table.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, in this example, the winning probabilities of the notice contents "None", "Game property explanation", "Setting suggestion explanation 1", "Setting suggestion explanation 2", and "Setting suggestion explanation 3" are "for raising" and "for raising". Although they are the same for "lowering", the winning probabilities of "setting suggestion explanation 4" and "setting suggestion explanation 5" are different between "for raising" and "for lowering". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 4", the winning probabilities of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "lowering" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "raising" are other than "0". Specifically, in this example, it is set to "1000/10000", and therefore "setting suggestion explanation 4" is a notice content that can appear only in the case of "for raising". Regarding "setting suggestion explanation 5", the winning probabilities of the set values Ve "1" to "6" and "for raising" are all set to "0", while the winning probabilities of "for lowering" are "0". Other than ("1000/10000" in this example), therefore, "setting suggestion explanation 5" is a notice content that can appear only in the case of "lowering".

In FIG. 62, the CPU 241 ends the mini character advance notice lottery process in response to the execution of the determination process in step S2820.

Here, in determining whether or not the set value is higher than the previous time in step S2813 described above, the set value Ve stored in the "history setting value storage area A2" in the RAM 243 and the "notification setting value storage area" are used. The set value Ve stored in "A1" is compared. At this time, in the RAM 243, an area for storing the previous set value Ve separately from the "history setting value storage area A2" ( “Previously set value storage area A3”) may be provided.
In this case, the memory 244 stores the previous set value Ve separately from the setting history information. For example, when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off, the value of the "notification setting value storage area A1" is stored in the memory 244. It is also possible to configure the value written in the memory 244 to be read into the "previously set value storage area A3" at the time of writing and turning on the power.
Then, regarding the lottery of the effect, the increase / decrease is determined by comparing the values of the "previous set value storage area A3" and the "notification setting value storage area A1".

In step S2813, if the previous and current set value Ve are the same value, refer to the second mini character notice lottery table with the current set value Ve stored in the "notification set value storage area A1" as an offset. It is conceivable to do.

(Suggestion production by jackpot end production)

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a jackpot effect lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
The lottery process shown in FIG. 67 is a process in which the content of the jackpot end INT (interval) effect that appears when the round game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds is drawn based on the set value Ve. Specifically, a lottery of background images is performed in the big hit end INT effect.
In addition, for the sake of explanation, it is assumed that there are three types of hits, "3R probability variation", "9R probability variation", and "3R time reduction".

First, in step S2901, the CPU 241 determines whether or not the hit type is "3R probability variation". The winning type is notified by, for example, a decorative symbol designation command transmitted from the main control unit 20.
If the hit type is not "3R probability variation", the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2902 to determine whether or not the hit type is "9R probability variation", and if the hit type is not "9R probability variation", it is shown in FIG. Finish the jackpot production lottery process. That is, when the hit type is "3R time reduction", the setting suggestion by the big hit end INT effect is not performed.

In each of the case where the hit type is "3R probability change" in step S2901 and the case where the hit type is "9R probability change" in step S2902, whether the CPU 241 proceeds with the process in step S2903 and is in the process of probability change. Judge whether or not. This corresponds to determining whether or not this hit is a hit as a consecutive villa (whether or not it is the first hit).

When it is determined that the probability change is not in progress, that is, it is the first hit, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2904 to execute the set value information acquisition process, and then acquires the offset value from the first offset table based on the set value information in step S2905. Then, in the following step S2906, a process of selecting the lottery table based on the offset value is performed. Further, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2910 and determines a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT based on the lottery value.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a lottery table for drawing the jackpot end INT suggestion element used in step S2906 (hereinafter referred to as “big hit end INT suggestion element table”), and FIG. 69 is the first used in step S2905. An example of an offset table is shown (note that these tables are also stored in predetermined areas of ROM 242).
In the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, offset values of "0" to "5" are set with respect to the set values Ve "1" to "6".

In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of FIG. 68, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each content of the jackpot end INT effect. In this example, the background image in the jackpot end INT effect is used for the setting suggestion, and as shown in the figure, a total of 13 types of contents of "none (no predetermined background image)" and "background 1" to "background 12" are used. As a lottery table, a plurality of tables that determine the distribution of winning probabilities for these contents are prepared.
In the jackpot end INT suggestion element table of this example, six lottery tables that determine the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" are stored in order from the upper layer side, and the lower layer side thereof. Further, six are stored in which the distribution for each of the set values Ve "1" to "6" is determined. The six lottery tables on the upper layer side are the tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the first hit, and the six lottery tables on the lower layer side are the tables that determine the distribution for each set value Ve corresponding to the consecutive villas. It is said that.

In FIG. 67, in the acquisition process of step S2905, an offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S2904 is acquired from the first offset table shown in FIG. 69, and in the selection process of step S2906, the offset value is based on the offset value. Then, the lottery table is selected from the jackpot end INT suggestion element table shown in FIG. 68. At this time, in the first offset table, the offset value with respect to the set value Ve is in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the selection process of step S2906, a lottery is performed from the six upper layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table. The table is selected. That is, as a result, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve is selected from the lottery tables corresponding to the first hit.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2906, a process of determining the background (may not be present) as a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT is performed according to the selected lottery table.

Further, in the previous step S2903, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress, that is, during the consecutive villas, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2907 to execute the set value information acquisition process, and then is based on the set value information in step S2908. The offset value is acquired from the second offset table, the lottery table is selected based on the offset value in the subsequent step S2909, and the determination process of step S2910 is executed.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the second offset table used in step S2908 (the second offset table is also stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 242).
As shown in the figure, in the second offset table, offset values of "6" to "11" are defined with respect to the set values Ve "1" to "6".
Therefore, in the acquisition process of step S2908, the lottery table is selected from the six lower layers in the jackpot end INT suggestion element table, that is, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve from the lottery tables corresponding to the consecutive villas. Is selected.
In the determination process of step S2910 executed following step S2909, a process of determining the background (may not be present) as a suggestion element during the jackpot end INT is performed according to the lottery table selected in step S2909.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this example, for the lottery table stored in the upper layer side corresponding to the first hit, the distribution value for the backgrounds 7 to 12 is set to 0, and the lottery table corresponding to the consecutive villas on the lower layer side. The distribution value for background 1 to background 6 is set to 0. As a result, backgrounds 1 to 6 are not displayed at the time of consecutive villas (the backgrounds are not displayed as setting suggestion elements), and backgrounds 7 to 12 are not displayed at the time of the first hit.

The CPU 241 ends the jackpot effect lottery process shown in FIG. 67 in response to the execution of the determination process in step S2910.

Here, as described above, offset tables (FIGS. 69 and 70) in which different offset values are set for the common set value Ve are provided, and the offset tables are used properly according to the conditions to end the jackpot as shown in FIG. 68. By performing a lottery using the INT suggestion element table, it is possible to make the table reference process a common process when performing a lottery different for each condition as a lottery for the setting suggestion element, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity. it can.

(Suggestion production by SU notice)

Subsequently, the suggestion effect by the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77.
The SU advance notice effect is a kind of advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of controlling to an advantageous state which is an advantageous state for the player, and is an effect having one to a plurality of stages of advance notice steps. In other words, it is a stage notice production with stages.
In this example, the content of the SU notice effect, specifically, the effect suggesting the set value Ve can be displayed by using the background image.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the SU notice lottery process executed by the CPU 241.
First, as the variation pattern information acquisition process in step S3001, the CPU 241 performs a process of acquiring information on the winning variation pattern based on, for example, the above-mentioned decorative symbol designation command. Next, the CPU 241 acquires an offset value from the offset table based on the winning fluctuation pattern in step S3002, selects a lottery table based on the offset value in step S3003, and performs a SU step based on the lottery value in step S3004. And perform the process of determining the content.

FIG. 72 shows an example of a SU effect table used in the selection process of step S3003, and FIG. 73 shows an example of an offset table for SU stage lottery used in the acquisition process of step S3002. Each is stored in the area).
In the SU stage lottery offset table shown in FIG. 73, the short variation pattern (“short variation P”) and the reach variation pattern (“reach variation P”” are similar to the first notice offset table shown in FIG. ), The offset value is set for each super reach fluctuation pattern (“SP reach P”). In this example, the offset is 0 for the short fluctuation pattern, 1 for the reach fluctuation pattern, and 2 for the super reach fluctuation pattern. Each value is set.

In the SU effect table of FIG. 72, a plurality of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution of winning probabilities is determined for each lottery target related to the SU notice effect. In this example, the lottery target as SU notice production "None" and each lottery as SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B). Three types of lottery tables are prepared in which the distribution values for each target are set (“Table 1”, “Table 2”, and “Table 3” in the figure). Here, the parentheses such as (white frame) attached after SU1 to SU5 indicating the SU stage mean the content of the SU notice effect, specifically, the type of the background image. For example, (white frame) is A background image with a white frame, and (character A) and (character B) mean a background image including an image of a specific character, respectively.
In the SU effect table, "table 1", "table 2", and "table 3" are stored in order from the upper layer side.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3002, an offset value is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 73 based on the information of the winning fluctuation pattern, and in the selection process of step S3003, the table shown in FIG. 72 is acquired based on the offset value. The lottery table is selected from. Specifically, in this example, when the winning fluctuation pattern is a short fluctuation pattern and 0 is acquired as an offset value, table 1 is selected. Further, if the winning fluctuation pattern is the reach fluctuation pattern and 1 is acquired as the offset value, the table 2 is selected, and if the winning fluctuation pattern is the super reach fluctuation pattern and 2 is acquired as the offset value, the table 3 is selected. Be selected.
Then, in step S3004 following step S3003, the CPU 241 sets the SU notice effect "none" based on the stored value (lottery value) of the table selected from the tables 1 to 3 in this way and the random number value for the lottery. , SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), or SU5 (character B). That is, the stage and content of SU are determined.

According to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 72 (also in this case, it is assumed that the lottery random numbers can take 10000 patterns of 1 to 9999), in the table 1 corresponding to the short fluctuation pattern, the SU notice effect "None" The winning probability of "" is the highest, followed by the winning probability of SU1 (white frame), and the remaining SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B). ) Has a winning probability of 0.
In the table 2 corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern, SU5 (character B), SU4 (character A), SU notice production "none", SU1 (white frame), SU2 (white frame), SU3 (white frame), in that order. The winning probability is gradually increasing.
In Table 3 corresponding to the super reach fluctuation pattern, the winning probability of SU5 (Character B) is the highest, and thereafter, SU4 (Character A), SU3 (white frame), and SU notice production "None" gradually occur in this order. The winning probability is lowered, and the winning probability of SU1 (white frame) and SU2 (white frame) is the lowest.

The CPU 241 determines whether or not SU3 or higher has been won in step S3005 in response to executing the process of step S3004. That is, it is determined whether or not any one of SU3 (white frame), SU4 (character A), and SU5 (character B) is determined in step S3004.
If SU3 or higher is not won, the CPU 241 ends the SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71. That is, in the case of winning SU2 or less, the process for replacing the contents of the SU notice effect described below is not performed.

On the other hand, if SU3 or higher is won, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3006 and determines whether or not the previous SU3 Danger has been removed. That is, the SU notice effect that appeared last time is a SU notice effect of SU3 or higher in which the background is replaced with the background of the Danger pattern frame by replacing the contents using the SU3 replacement table described later, and the SU notice effect is the target of the notice. It is determined whether or not a deviation determination result is obtained in the symbol variation display game.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the SU3 danger was removed last time, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S3007, acquires an offset value from the offset table without referring to the set value, and then in step S3008, draws a lottery table based on the offset value. The selection is made, and in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the SU3 replacement table used in the selection process of step S3008, and FIG. 75 shows an example of the SU3 replacement offset table used in the acquisition process of step S3007 (these tables are also in a predetermined area of ROM 242). Each is stored).
In the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, an offset value is set for each set value Ve. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the offset values "0" to "6" are set with respect to the set values Ve "1" to "6". "5" is defined.
In the SU3 replacement table shown in FIG. 74, a lottery table in which the distribution values for the replacement contents of "default", "red", and "danger" are determined is prepared for each set value Ve. Here, "default" means that the frame in the background is not replaced, and "red" and "danger" mean that the frame is replaced with red and a danger pattern, respectively.
As shown in the figure, in the SU3 replacement table, the lottery table having the set value Ve "1" is stored in the uppermost layer, and thereafter, the lottery table having a larger numerical value of the set value Ve is stored so as to be located in the lower layer side. There is.

In FIG. 71, in the acquisition process of step S3007, the offset value is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75 without referring to the set value Ve. That is, the CPU 241 acquires the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" in the offset table. Then, in the selection process of step S3008, the lottery table is selected from the SU3 replacement table based on the offset value "0" acquired in this way. Specifically, the lottery table corresponding to the set value Ve "1" stored in the uppermost layer of the SU3 replacement table is selected.
Then, in the determination process of step S3012 executed following step S3008, the replacement content is determined from "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in this way.

Here, according to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table having the highest "default" winning probability is selected by performing the above-mentioned processing of steps S3007 → S3008 → S3012. That is, the lottery table with the lowest possibility of replacement is selected. As a result, if the SU3 Danger is removed last time, it becomes difficult for the SU3 Danger to perform the SU notice effect again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S3006 that the SU3 Danger was removed last time, the CPU 241 executes the set value information acquisition process in step S3009 and then acquires the offset value from the offset table based on the set value information in step S3010. Then, in the following step S3011, the lottery table is selected based on the offset value, and in step S3012, the replacement content of SU3 is determined based on the lottery value.

Specifically, in the acquisition process of step S3010, the offset value corresponding to the set value Ve acquired in step S3009 is acquired from the SU3 replacement offset table shown in FIG. 75, and in the subsequent step S3011, the SU3 shown in FIG. 74 is acquired. From the replacement table, select the lottery table based on the acquired offset value. Specifically, if the offset value is "0", the lottery table with the set value Ve "1" stored in the uppermost layer position is selected, and if the offset value is "1", it is stored in the position next to the uppermost layer position. The lottery table stored at the position (address) specified by the offset value is selected, such as selecting the lottery table with the set value "2".
Then, in the determination process of step S3012 in this case, the replacement content is determined from "default", "red", and "danger" based on the lottery table selected in step S3011.

According to the example of the distribution value shown in FIG. 74, in the SU3 replacement table in this case, the higher the setting, the lower the "default" winning probability, while the higher the "red" setting, the higher the winning probability. Has been done. Regarding "Danger", the winning probability is lower than that of "Danger" and "Red" regardless of the set value Ve, and the winning probability is highest when the set value Ve "6" is the highest setting. Has been made. In this example, the winning probability of the "danger" is the same for the set values Ve "1" to "5", and the winning probability is increased only for the set value Ve "6".

The CPU 241 ends the SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 71 in response to the execution of the determination process in step S3012.

As understood from the series of processes described above, in the present embodiment, the "stage" of the SU notice effect (stage notice effect) can be determined based on the fluctuation information, and the "content" of the SU notice effect is set to the set value Ve. It can be decided based on. Specifically, in this example, the "content" of the SU notice production can be determined by replacement.

Regarding the setting suggestion using the stage notice effect, if the stage of the stage notice effect is determined based on the set value, it becomes difficult for the stage notice effect to develop and it becomes difficult to enhance the effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage advance notice effect can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the advance notice content of the stage advance notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, in realizing the setting suggestion effect using the stage notice effect, it is possible to prevent the stage notice effect from becoming difficult to develop, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Normally, a plurality of types of advance notice effects are implemented in a game machine, but all of the advance notices having stages as the contents of the advance notice effects may be configured as described above, or only some of the advance notices may be described above. The configuration may be as follows. Further, in order to enhance the entertainment of the production, for some notices, the "stage" may be determined based on the set value Ve, and the "content" may be determined based on the fluctuation information. By doing so, it is possible to give different characteristics between the notices, and it is possible to improve the production interest.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing another example of the SU notice lottery process.
First, in this alternative example, the table shown in FIG. 77 is prepared as the SU3 replacement offset table stored in the ROM 242. That is, a table having the same contents as that shown in FIG. 75 is stored as the SU3 replacement first offset table (FIG. 77A), and a SU3 replacement second offset table different from the SU3 replacement first offset table is stored. (Fig. 77B).
In the SU3 replacement second offset table, the same offset value (“0” in this example) is stored for the set value Ve of “1” to “6”.

The SU notice lottery process shown in FIG. 76 is different in that the processes of steps S3020 and S3021 are executed instead of the process of step S3007 shown in FIG. 71 as the process executed when the SU3 danger is removed last time.
In this case, the CPU 241 acquires the set value Ve stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 by acquiring the set value information in step S3020, and in the subsequent step S3021, the offset value is offset from the SU3 replacement second offset table based on the set value information. Is acquired, and the process proceeds to the lottery table selection process in step S3008.
Since the offset value acquired in step S3021 is the same value regardless of the set value Ve, in the selection process of step S3008 in this case, the same lottery table is selected regardless of the set value Ve. Specifically, in this example, since the offset value "0" corresponding to the set value Ve "1" is selected, the lottery table in which the content replacement is most unlikely to occur is selected as in the case of the processing example of FIG. 71. become.
In the acquisition process of step S3010 in this case, the SU3 replacement first offset table shown in FIG. 77A is used as the offset table.

As described above, the method for selecting the same lottery table regardless of the set value Ve is not limited to the method of acquiring a fixed offset value without referring to the set value Ve, as shown in FIG. 77B. It is also possible to adopt a method of selecting a lottery table based on the offset value obtained from the offset table in which the same offset value is stored in each set value Ve.

Here, the lottery for the SU notice production may be performed in the following manner.
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a lottery mode of the SU notice effect in the embodiment.
First, in the figure, the unfolded M06J-1, the unfolded M06J-2, and the unfolded M06J-3 shown in the lower left of the upper table mean the following unfolded, respectively.

M06J-1: While staying in a specific background mode, the pre-reading notice is not won and the target SU notice (fireworks launch SU notice) is won.

M06J-2: While staying in a specific background mode, pre-reading notice is being executed and the target SU notice is won.

M06J-3: While staying in a specific background mode, the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice and the target SU notice is won.

In the development M06J-1, a lottery for the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL1. Further, in the development M06J-2 and the development M06J-3, the lottery for the target SU notice is performed based on the table TBL2 and the table TBL3, respectively.

In the development M06J-1, the case where SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL1 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as the development M06L-1.
Further, in the development M06J-2, the case where the SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL2 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as the development M06L-2.
Further, in the development M06J-3, the case where the SU3 and SU4 are won as a result of the lottery based on the table TBL3 and the case where the SU5 is won are referred to as the development M06L-3.
When SU5 is won in these developments M06L-1 to M06L-3, a lottery is performed based on the tables TBL4, TBL5, and TBL6 for the contents of SU5, respectively.

The lower table of FIG. 78 exemplifies the drawing player method for the content replacement (background replacement) of SU3 for each development of M06L-1 to M06L-3.
As shown in the figure, in the deployed M06L-1, it is determined whether or not the Danger was removed last time (see step S3006). If it was off in the previous Danger, there is no branch for each set value Ve, and the replacement contents are drawn based on the table TBL4.
On the other hand, if the Danger did not come off last time, the lottery player method branches for each set value Ve. Specifically, the replacement contents are drawn by using a different table (tables TBL5 to TBL10 in the figure) for each set value Ve of "1" to "6".

Further, in the expanded M06L-2 and the expanded M06L-3, there is no branch depending on whether or not the Danger was removed last time, and there is no branch depending on the set value Ve, and the replacement contents are drawn based on the tables TBL11 and TBL12 as shown in the figure.

In the above-mentioned lottery player method, it is possible to suggest the setting by the SU notice in the state where the pre-reading notice is not won as the development M06J-1.
As a result, in fluctuations with low hit expectations that are not enough to look ahead, or fluctuations in which the look-ahead notice is not executed toward the target change of look-ahead, the role of SU notice is used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the change. Instead, it can be used to suggest a setting.

Further, in the state where the pre-reading notice is being executed as the deployment M06J-2, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
When the pre-reading notice is executed using multiple fluctuations, if the SU notice is won in the fluctuation during the pre-reading, the pre-reading that suggests the winning expectation is performed toward the target fluctuation of the pre-reading. Since it is inside, it is not used for the purpose of suggesting the setting as the role of SU notice. In other words, the look-ahead notice suggests the degree of expectation of winning toward the target change, and the player's interest is focused on that, so in such a situation, do not include the setting suggestion element, and the player We are trying to prevent confusion.

Further, even in the state where the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice as the deployment M06J-3, the setting suggestion by the SU notice is not performed.
In this case, since the fluctuation is a look-ahead target fluctuation and has a high expectation of hitting, the role of SU notice should be used for the purpose of suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation, and not for the purpose of suggesting the setting. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

As the above-mentioned drawing player method, the expansion M06L-1, the expansion M06L-2, and the expansion M06L-3 are adopted, but any one may be adopted, or any combination may be adopted. Good.
Regarding the deployment M06L-2, if there are multiple types of look-ahead notices, the settings are not suggested by SU notices only during the execution of a specific look-ahead notice (eg, full-screen look-ahead notices, etc.), and other It may be configured to suggest the setting by the SU notice during the execution of the look-ahead notice (eg, the hold change notice, etc.).
Regarding the expansion M06L-3, when there are multiple types of look-ahead notices, the setting suggestion by SU notice is not performed when the change is the target change of a specific look-ahead notice (eg, full-screen look-ahead notice, etc.). In the state where the change is the target change of other pre-reading notices (eg, pending change notice, etc.), the setting suggestion may be made by the SU notice.
In addition, if the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the setting suggestion is not performed by the setting suggestion notice including the setting suggestion element such as the SU notice described above, and if the fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation, the setting suggestion is given. It may be configured to do so.

[5-5. About the difference in the set value range corresponding to the main control unit and the production control unit]

Here, as understood from the various lottery processes of the effect control unit 24 described above, in the effect control unit 24, the set value Ve is the actual usage range Ru (“1”, “2”, “6” in this example. ), But if the value is within the usable range Re (“1” to “6”), the effect lottery is configured to be normally performed without causing an error.

On the other hand, the main control unit 20 cannot execute at least a specific process related to the progress of the game unless the set value Ve is a value within the actual usage range Ru. For example, in the jackpot random number determination process (S1502) described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27 above, when the set value Ve (set value Vd) is not within the range of use Ru, it is shown in FIG. 27. It becomes impossible to acquire appropriate judgment reference value TH and setting difference information from the random number judgment table for big hit judgment, and the big hit judgment cannot be properly executed.

The difference in correspondence between the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 with respect to the set values as described above can be expressed as follows.
That is, the main control unit 20 can set any one of the N (N is a natural number of 2 or more) species by the setting change process (step S115), and is based on the setting values of the N species. , It is possible to execute the first process related to the progress of the game operation.
On the other hand, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation based on the set value information of M types, which is larger than the N types, with respect to the set value information regarding the set values received from the main control unit 20. It is said that.

As a result, in order to make it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the effect control unit 24 can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 52A above, the effect control unit 24 uses a command (setting value information) for notifying the setting value transmitted by the main control unit 20, specifically, setting confirmation. Regarding the setting value information as the medium command and the command when changing the setting, it is possible to analyze the 6 types of setting value information corresponding to the usable range Re instead of the 3 types of setting value information corresponding to the actual usage range Ru. ing.
Specifically, for the command during setting confirmation and the command at the time of setting change, it is possible to receive the command including the identification data of any one of "1" to "6" in steps S2150 and S2152, respectively. It is possible to analyze the command of.

That is, if the three types of setting values Ve corresponding to the usage range Ru are N types of setting values that can be set by the setting change process, the effect control unit 24 has M types of setting values that are larger than the N types. The information is configured to be parseable.

As a result, when the number of steps of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can analyze the set value information up to the M step. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of set values to be used while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect control unit 24, when the set value Vd set in the setting change process on the main control unit 20 side corresponds to the set value analysis information based on the analyzed set value information ( For example, even if the set value Ve indicated by the set value Vd and the set value Ve indicated by the set value analysis information match) or do not correspond to each other, the predetermined process (various effect lottery processes described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 77) is performed. It is configured to be viable.

As a result, when the number of stages of the set value Ve can be changed, the effect control unit 24 can execute the process up to the M stage, and it is not necessary to rewrite the program of the effect control unit 24 up to the M stage. It becomes possible to do.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value Ve while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Here, according to the process of FIG. 52A, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting change end command has been received in step S2154, the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 is within an appropriate range. It is assumed that the setting change end scenario registration process is executed in step S2158 without confirming whether or not there is any (see step S2162).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect control unit 24 side from notifying the abnormality of the set value when the main control unit 20 side is about to end the setting change process normally. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the main control unit 20 side advances the subsequent game operation in response to the normal end of the setting change process even though the effect control unit 24 side is performing the abnormality notification. It is possible to prevent people from feeling anxious.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, the effect control unit 24 determines in step S2162 whether or not the set value Ve received from the main control unit 20 side is within the usable range Re, and if it is within the usable range Re. The received set value Ve (identification data described above) is stored in the RAM 243 (specifically, the “notification set value storage area A1” described above), and if it is outside the usable range Re, the received set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243. It is not supposed to be.
When the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve is not stored in the RAM 243, but in the present embodiment, the "set value command" is transmitted at a plurality of timings other than when the setting is changed. Is transmitted at least at the time of recovery from power failure (S808 when recovery from power failure) and at the start of fluctuation (S1411), so that the set value Ve within the usable range Re is received at those timings. An appropriate set value Ve can be stored in the RAM 243.

In addition to the timings illustrated above, the set value command can also be transmitted during a customer waiting demo, at the start or end of a big hit or small hit, at the start of a round game, at the start of an INT between rounds, or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Re, it is stored in the RAM 243 as it is even if it is not within the usable range Ru. Since the lottery process corresponds to the set value Ve of the usable range Re in this embodiment as in the lottery process related to various effects (FIGS. 57 to 77, etc.), the set value Ve is a value within the usable range Ru. Even if it is not, no bug will occur in the production lottery process.

Further, according to the process of FIG. 52A, when the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is RAM243 (specifically, in the setting history information update process in step S2166). It is stored in the above-mentioned “history setting value storage area A2”) (see step S2404 in FIG. 53).
However, even if the set value Ve outside the usable range Re is stored in the history set value storage area A2 in this way, the abnormality confirmation of the set value Ve is performed during the transmission process of step S2607 (FIG. 55) described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate setting value Ve outside the usable range Re from being displayed on the setting history confirmation screen Gs.
As described above, as the process of confirming the abnormality at this time, after determining whether or not the individual history information of the transmission target is the history information (setting change history information) about the setting change, the setting change history information is used. If there is, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve included in the history information is a value outside the usable range Re, and if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, the liquid crystal control The instruction information of the abnormality display is transmitted to the unit 40. As a result, on the setting history confirmation screen Gs, it is possible to display information indicating that an abnormality has been found in the set value Ve in the corresponding individual history information (for example, display of an "E" mark meaning an error).

<6. Modification example>

Here, in the above, the set value Ve (set value Ve saved in step S416) set in the setting change process (S115) shown in FIG. 10 is set in the main loop preprocessing (S119) shown in FIG. An example of transmitting to the effect control unit 24 side by the value command (S808) has been given, but the set value Ve set by the setting change process can also be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command at the end of the setting change. Specifically, in the embodiment, as the command at the end of the setting change, the setting change end command is transmitted (S605, S606) in the RAM clear process (S116) shown in FIG. 14, but this setting change end command Alternatively, a "setting change completion command" including the set value Ve set in the setting change process may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Further, in the process of FIG. 52A described above, the process (S2163) in which the effect control unit 24 stores the set value Ve in the RAM 243 can be executed every time the set value command from the main control unit 20 is received. However, the storage process of the set value Ve for the RAM 243 may be performed only when the setting is changed.
When the storage process of the set value Ve in the RAM 243 is performed only when the setting is changed, the set value Ve is out of the usable range Re as in the process shown in FIG. 52A. If is not stored (route from S2162 to S2164), the set value Ve will not be set in the RAM 243.
Therefore, in this case, if the set value Ve is outside the usable range Re, the value representing the set value Ve "1" (in other words, the value representing the lowest stage of the set value Ve) is stored in the RAM 243. While preventing an abnormal set value Ve from being set in the RAM 243, it is possible to prevent the set value Ve from being set itself.

FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command process S2130e as a first modification, which includes the storage of the lowest step value as described above.
The setting-related command processing S2130e as the first modification corresponds to the case where the main control unit 20 transmits the setting value Ve set in the setting change processing by the above-mentioned "setting change completion command" to the effect control unit 24 side. It is said that the processing was done.
The differences from the processing shown in FIG. 52A are that the reception determination processing of the setting change end command in step S2154 is omitted, the processing of steps S2159 to S2161 and the processing of step S2164 are omitted, and step S2181. This is the point where the processing of is added.

In the process shown in FIG. 79, the CPU 241 first performs the reception determination process of the "setting change completion command" in step S2180. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command including the notification information (identification data) of any of the set values Ve "1" to "6" is received as the "setting change completion command".
If it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has not been received, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2150. In this case, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2153 in response to the negative result obtained in step S2151. If a negative result is obtained in step S2153, the CPU 241 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 79.
Further, in this case, the CPU 241 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. 79 in response to executing each scenario registration process in steps S2155 to S2157.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2180 that the "setting change completion command" (setting values "1" to "6") has been received, the CPU 241 executes the setting change end scenario registration process in step S2158.
If the set value Ve included in the received "setting change completion command" is within the usable range Re of "1" to "6" by the determination process of step S2180 described above, the setting change end scenario is set in step S2158. be registered. That is, even when an unused set value Ve within the usable range Re is received, an effect of notifying the end of the setting change is performed.

In response to the execution of the scenario registration process in step S2158, the CPU 241 determines in step S2162 whether or not the setting information is in the usable range Re.
Then, when the setting information is in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 performs a process of storing the set value information in the RAM in step S2163, and proceeds to the history information update process of step S2166.
On the other hand, if the setting information is not in the usable range Re, the CPU 241 stores the set value "1" in the RAM 243 in step S2181 and proceeds to the history information update process in step S2166.

By the processing as the first modification as described above, if the set value Ve is a value outside the usable range Re, a specific value (specific value) is stored in the RAM 243, corresponding to the case where the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 only when the setting is changed. In this example, "1") can be stored.

When a specific value (“1”) is stored in the set value storage area (“notification setting value storage area A1”) of the RAM 243 as in the first modification described above, the set value in the setting history information is used. A specific value (“1”) may also be stored for Ve (that is, the above-mentioned “history setting value storage area A2”).
Alternatively, an abnormal value may be stored in the setting history information.
By storing the abnormal value in the setting history information, it is possible to save the fact that the set value Ve is abnormal as the history information while making the lottery of the game performed based on the specific value.

Here, as the suitability determination of the set value Ve when the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243, it is also possible to determine whether or not it is within the usable range Ru, not whether it is within the usable range Re.
For example, when the set value Ve to be used is set to "1", "2", and "6" as in this example, first, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is within the usable range Re, and the value is used. If the value is within the possible range Re, it is further determined whether or not the set value Ve is an unused value (any of "3", "4", and "5").
At this time, if the set value Ve is not an unused value, the set value Ve is stored in the RAM 243 as it is. On the other hand, when the set value Ve is an unused value, it is conceivable to store a specific value (“1”) in the RAM 243. Alternatively, when the set value Ve is an unused value, the set value Ve can be corrected to the value of the usage range Ru and stored in the RAM 243. For example, when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2", and when it is "5", it is corrected to "6".

FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of the setting-related command process S2130e as a second modification including the correction of the set value Ve as described above.
The difference from the processing shown in FIG. 79 is that the processing of steps S2182 and S2183 is added.
In this case, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2182 in response to the determination in step S2162 that the setting information is in the usable range Re, and determines whether or not the setting information is an unused value. Specifically, in this example, it is determined whether or not the set value Ve is any of "3", "4", and "5" (any of "02H", "03H", and "04H").
If it is determined that the setting information is not an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2163 and stores the setting information in the RAM 243. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting information is an unused value, the CPU 241 proceeds to step S2183 and stores the correction value in the RAM 243 with reference to the setting value correction table. Specifically, in this example, the set value correction table (stored in a predetermined area of ROM 242) is referred to, and when the set value Ve is "3" or "4", it is corrected to "2" and "5". When the case is corrected to "6", the corrected setting value Ve is stored in the "notification setting value storage area A1" of the RAM 243.

Here, in the description so far, the main control unit 20 uses the set value offset conversion table shown in FIG. 16 to set the set value Vd handled by the main control unit 20 side according to the program on the effect control unit 24 side. An example of converting to a value Ve has been given, but the main control unit 20 transmits information on the set value Vd to the effect control unit 24 without performing conversion using the set value offset conversion table, and sets the value on the effect control unit 24 side. A configuration that converts the value Vd can also be adopted.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a set value conversion table to be used on the effect control unit 24 side in this case. Here, it is assumed that the stage of the set value Ve and the value to be used are uniquely determined by the spec information of the game machine 1.

As shown in the figure, the set value conversion table includes a conversion table that stores information on the set value Vd transmitted by the main control unit 20 side, specifically, conversion values for each of "0" to "5". There are four types, "Spec 1" to "Spec 4").

In this case, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) selects the corresponding conversion table from the setting conversion table based on the information of the specifications specified by the above-mentioned spec specification command, for example, and the setting value Vd received from the main control unit 20. Is converted based on the selected conversion table.
Here, "Spec 1" has 6 stages of setting, and the main control unit 20 in this case uses "0" to "5" as the set value Vd. "Spec 2" and "Spec 3" have two setting stages and three setting stages, respectively, and the main control unit 20 uses "0", "1", and "0" to "3" as set values Vd, respectively. "Spec 4" is "no setting", and in this case, "0" is stored as a conversion value for each setting value Vd as shown in the figure.

By configuring the effect control unit 24 side to convert the set value as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control unit 20 side.

<7. Summary of embodiments>

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is based on a control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of the gaming operation and a predetermined operation, and whether or not the pachinko gaming machine (1) is elected to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is provided with a setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a setting value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
Then, the storage means stores a data table (for example, the set value offset conversion table of FIG. 16) including a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value, and the data table is set. The first setting value related information, which is the setting value related information selected when the setting value that can be set by the means is referred to, and the setting value related information that is selected when the setting value that cannot be set by the setting means is referred to. A certain second set value related information and is included, and as the first set value related information, at least specific information about the set value indicating the stage where the winning probability is the lowest is stored, and the second set value related information is stored. As, the same information as the specific information is stored.

When the set value is a value that cannot be set, it is conceivable to rewrite the set value stored in the RAM to a value indicating the lowest stage.
However, if the data is tampered with after rewriting, the corresponding information may be acquired from the data table based on the unsettable setting value, and the operation according to the unsettable setting value may be realized.
According to the above configuration, it is impossible to acquire information according to the setting value that cannot be set from the data table, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from being established, and to improve the fairness of the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine as the embodiment, 0 is stored as specific information.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the establishment of fraudulent acts by falsifying the set value by a simple method of writing the specific information = 0 in the set value related information. That is, the fairness of the game can be enhanced by a simple method.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment determines whether or not to win the gaming state advantageous to the player based on the control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of the gaming operation and the predetermined operation. It includes a setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a setting value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
Then, the storage means includes a first data table (for example, a random number determination table for jackpot determination in FIG. 27) including a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value, and a layer lower than the first data table. A second data table (for example, the special symbol creation address table of FIG. 34) that is stored in the storage area on the side and does not include the set value related information is stored, and the first data table is used for progress control. Used data storage area (for example, addresses "4093" to "4111") in which data is stored and unused data storage area (for example, addresses "4113" to "4118") in which unused data not used for progress control are stored. ") And.

When only the used data storage area is secured in the first data table containing the setting value related information, when trying to increase the number of setting values to be used (the number of stages), the increased setting value is used. When the information related to the set value is added to the first data table, it is necessary to shift the data after the second data table to be stored in the lower layer to the lower layer side. That is, the data after the second data table is forced to be rewritten to shift the storage area.
When trying to increase the number of set values to be used by securing a storage area for not only used data but also unused data in the first data table containing the set value related information as described above, it increases. It is possible to store the set value-related information related to the set value of the minute in the storage area of the unused data.
Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for rewriting the data after the second data table, and it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values to be used.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the usage data storage area stores usage data having a capacity corresponding to the number of set values that can be set by the setting means, and the unused data storage area contains the setting means. Unused data of the capacity corresponding to the number of unsettable setting values is stored.

As a result, as the storage capacity of the unused data storage area, it is possible to secure a capacity for storing the set value-related information related to the increased set value when the number of steps of the set value is increased. it can.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, 0 is stored as unused data.

As a result, even if the first data table is referred to by the unused set value Vd, it is possible to prevent the setting value related information corresponding to the unused set value Vd from being acquired. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being established, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment determines whether or not to win the gaming state advantageous to the player based on the control means (main control unit 20) that controls the progress of the gaming operation and the predetermined operation. It includes a setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a setting value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability, and a storage means (ROM202) in which data used by the control means for progress control is stored.
The storage means includes a first data table (for example, the set value offset conversion table of FIG. 16) including a plurality of set value related information selected by referring to the set value, and a second data table that does not include the set value related information. Two data tables (for example, the special symbol creation address table of FIG. 34) are stored, and the storage means stores the first data table in the storage area on the lower layer side of the second data table, and the first data. The second data table is not stored in the storage area below the table (see FIG. 35).

As a result, when increasing the number of set values to be used, it is sufficient to rewrite the contents of the first data table located at the bottom layer of the data area in the storage means, and the data on the lower layer side of the first data table. It is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the part.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of data rewriting work associated with changing the number of set values to be used.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment includes a main control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation and an effect control means (effect control unit 24) for controlling the progress of the effect operation. In addition, the main control means is a setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a setting value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not to win the gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. The effect control means has a transmission means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809) capable of transmitting predetermined information, and the setting means can set any one of N types. The transmission means is capable of transmitting the set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
Then, the effect control means has an analysis means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the set value information received from the main control means, and the analysis means obtains M kinds of set value information more than N kinds. It is configured to be parseable.

As a result, in order to make it possible to change the number of set values to be used, the effect control means can analyze the set value information up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of set values to be used while reducing the burden of program rewriting work.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the effect control means supports even when the set value set by the setting means and the set value analysis information based on the set value information analyzed by the analysis means correspond to each other. It is configured so that the predetermined processing can be executed even if it is not performed.

As a result, when the number of stages of the set value can be changed, the effect control means can execute the process up to the M stage, and it is not necessary to rewrite the program of the effect control means up to the M stage. It will be possible.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment includes a main control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the progress of the game operation and an effect control means (effect control unit 24) for controlling the progress of the effect operation. In addition, the main control means is a setting means (setting change process: S115) capable of setting a setting value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not to win the gaming state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined operation. The effect control means has a transmission means (for example, transmission processing of S705 or S809) capable of transmitting predetermined information, and the setting means can set any one of N types. The transmission means is configured to be able to transmit the set value information regarding the set value set by the setting means to the effect control means.
Then, the effect control means has an analysis means (setting-related command processing: S2130e) capable of analyzing the set value information received from the main control means, and the analysis means obtains M kinds of set value information more than N kinds. It is configured to be parseable.
On that basis, the main control means can execute the first process related to the progress of the game operation based on the set value of the N type, and the effect control means can execute the effect operation based on the set value information of the M type. The second process related to the progress can be executed.

As a result, in order to make it possible to change the number of stages of the set value, the effect control means can execute the second process related to the progress of the effect operation up to the M stage. That is, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the program of the effect control means up to the M stage.
Therefore, it is possible to change the number of steps of the set value while reducing the burden of the program rewriting work.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (1) of the embodiment is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and controls it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and is a fluctuation pattern that determines a fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation of the symbol. The determination means (variable pattern lottery process of FIG. 28) and the progress control of the game operation are performed, and a set value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not to win the game state advantageous to the player is set based on the operation. Possible setting means (main control unit 20) and effect means (effect control unit 24 and light display device 45a, sound generator 46a, liquid crystal) for executing an effect including a notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. Display device 36 etc.) and.
The advance notice effect includes a stage advance notice effect having stages, and the effect means can determine the stage of the stage advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the advance notice content of the stage advance notice effect is based on the set value. It is decidable.

Regarding the setting suggestion using the stage notice effect, if the stage of the stage notice effect is determined based on the set value, it becomes difficult for the stage notice effect to develop and it becomes difficult to enhance the effect. Therefore, as described above, the stage of the stage advance notice effect can be determined according to the fluctuation information, and the advance notice content of the stage advance notice effect can be determined based on the set value.
As a result, in realizing the setting suggestion effect using the stage notice effect, it is possible to prevent the stage notice effect from becoming difficult to develop, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<8. Other variants>

In the description so far, a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium has been illustrated, but the game machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine that uses a game medium having a shape other than a spherical shape as the game medium, a rotating game machine, or the like may be used.

Further, the information displayed on the setting history screen Gs is not limited to the information illustrated in FIG. 46 and the like, and can be considered in various ways. For example, a certain set value may indicate how long the game has been played. Specifically, the date and time and time from when a certain set value is set to when it is changed next may be displayed. Further, the date and time and time from when the power is turned on until the game is played according to a certain set value and then the power is turned off may be displayed. Further, when the set value is determined to be an abnormal value, the date and time from the determination of the abnormal value to the setting of the normal set value may be displayed. In addition, originally, the set value is not changed during the game, or the set value does not change from the normal value to the abnormal value, but when the set value is changed even during the game due to noise or goto action. May store the date and time and display it as a history display. Further, the number of times the RAM clear processing and the backup restoration processing have been performed and the date and time information may be similarly displayed. Further, the timing of displaying the history display may be, for example, while the setting change process is being performed, in addition to the time when the setting confirmation process is being performed. Further, the history may be displayed when a predetermined operation input is input even during the game.

Further, in the above, an example is given in which the history information is saved in the internal work (work area of the RAM 243) according to the occurrence of the target event of the history display, and the history information saved in the internal work is immediately stored in the memory 244. However, as the timing for storing the history information of the internal work in the memory 244, the elapsed time stored in the internal work is referred to, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, it is stored (copied) in the memory 244. Is also possible.

In addition, regarding the setting history confirmation screen Gs, even after the display is finished in response to the end instruction operation, if a predetermined display condition such as setting confirmation (or setting change) is satisfied, the display instruction is given again. It can be displayed as many times as you like depending on the operation. Alternatively, if the setting history confirmation screen Gs has already been displayed a predetermined number of times such as once under the condition that the predetermined display condition is satisfied, the setting history confirmation screen Gs is displayed even if the display instruction operation is performed again. Can also be disabled.
In addition, it is desirable to hide the performance display monitor that displays the base value while the history information is being displayed. Further, the volume / light amount adjustment may be effective even while the history information is being displayed. At this time, although the adjustment is effective, it is desirable not to display the adjustment content on the display means.
Further, the contents and state of the performance display monitor may be displayed on the liquid crystal, and in that case, it is desirable to display the contents and the state at a position that does not overlap with the history information. Further, the volume / light amount may be configured to be non-adjustable. In this case, there is no risk that the history information and the display overlap, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen configuration is increased.

Further, it is desirable not to execute at least the initialization operation of the movable body on the board side while displaying the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body on the board side from moving to the front side of the display means and hindering the visibility of the display screen. Further, the movable body on the frame side may also be prevented from executing the initialization operation in the same manner. However, the movable body on the frame side may be initialized if there is no possibility of obstructing the display screen. In this case, for example, the initializing operation of the vibrating means mounted on the operating means, the air blowing means in which the air is ejected, or the like may also be performed. As a result, for the movable body on the frame side, the initialization operation can be completed first, so that the movable body on the board side can be moved after the display of the history information is completed, that is, after the setting confirmation process (or setting change process) is completed. It is efficient because you only have to initialize the body. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initialization operation may be performed for all the movable bodies after the display of the history information is completed.

Further, when the setting value is changed while the harness connecting the main control unit 20 and the effect control unit 24 is disconnected, the main control unit 20 processes based on the changed setting value. On the other hand, since the effect control unit 24 cannot know the information, it cannot be stored and displayed as history information. Therefore, by changing the set value with the harness disconnected, turning off the power once, and then turning on the power with the harness reconnected, the setting can be changed without leaving any evidence that the set value has been changed. You can do it. In order to prevent this, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 20 transmits the set value information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 transmits the stored set value information and the main control unit 20. If there is a contradiction by comparing with the information of the set value, an error notification may be performed using a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like.
Further, in this case, the effect control unit 24 side may be set to the game stop state, and even if a command related to the game is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the processing based on the command is not performed. You may. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives various commands transmitted when executing the setting change process or the RAM clear process, the main control unit 20 side is said to have performed the setting change process normally again. Judgment, memorize the newly determined setting value, and interrupt / cancel error notification (contradiction occurrence ⇒ error notification ⇒ power off ⇒ setting changing (non-error notification) ⇒ setting change completed (non-error notification)) You may try to do it. Further, when the power is turned on for the first time, there is no information on the set value on the effect control unit 24 side. Therefore, in such a case, when the information on the set value is transmitted from the main control unit 20. , It is desirable to configure so that error notification is not performed.

1, 1A Pachinko game machine 13 Direction button 16 Cross key 20 Main control board (main control unit)
201 CPU
202 ROM
203 RAM
24 Production control board (Production control unit)
241 CPU
242 ROM
243 RAM
36 Liquid crystal display device 38a, 38b Special symbol display device 40 Liquid crystal control unit 45 Decorative lamp 45a Light display device 46 Speaker 46a Sound generator 61 Front door open sensor 94 Setting key switch 97 Setting / performance display 98 RAM clear switch Gs Setting history confirmation screen

Claims (1)

A setting means that can set a setting value related to the winning probability of whether or not to win a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a setting means that can set a setting value.
A display means capable of displaying setting information, which is information related to the set value, and
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the settable means for starting the settable period, which is the settable period, and the setnable means.
Based on the establishment of the second condition, it is provided with a confirmation enabling means for starting a setting confirmation period, which is a period during which the setting value can be confirmed.
During the settable period and the setting confirmation period, the setting information is intermittently displayed on the display means at a predetermined cycle by using a common display control process.
The determination of the establishment of the first condition is configured to be executed with priority over the determination of the establishment of the second condition.
A gaming machine that executes a setting process for performing an operation confirmation display of the display means after the settable period or the setting confirmation period ends.

Images